BVH2412GB

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®
Instruction Manual
BV-H2412 GB
PASS - Service you can rely on
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control,
installation and commissioning through to seamless support
across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists,
you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever –
you need us.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

on hand to analyze problems and failures. Look at
www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest
Schenck Process Location.
Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

Then our service system PASS is the ticket. It covers the en-
tire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full
service. Interested?
Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
© by Schenck Process GmbH

Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
Phone: +49 6151 1531-0 ; www.schenckprocess.com
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,
regardless of method, without prior permission by
Schenck Process GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohi-
bited.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: Translation of the original German Instruction
(origin: ST4, 389079563 V1)

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 About This Manual ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................1
................................1
2 Safety notes................................
notes................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................3
..........3
2.1 Signal Words .........................................................................................................................................4
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ................................................................................................4
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes ..............................................................................................5
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ..........................................................................................6
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ........................................................................................6
3 General Diagram ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..................................................................
..................................7
..7
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?...........................................................................................................7
3.2 Some definitions ....................................................................................................................................8
3.3 Measuring principle ...............................................................................................................................9
3.3.1 Connecting the measuring unit and electronic equipment electrically ..........................................9
3.3.2 The Coriolis measuring principle ................................................................................................ 10
3.4 Control operating modes .................................................................................................................... 11
3.5 Automatic control ................................................................................................................................ 11
3.6 Batching .............................................................................................................................................. 11
3.7 Additional Bin Weighers ..................................................................................................................... 12
4 Operation................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
............................................................................
............................................13
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power ................................................................................................. 13
4.2 Operating and Control Access............................................................................................................ 13
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ........................................ 14
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable .................................................................................................. 14
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 14
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485 ............................................................................................................... 15
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 15
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet ............................................................................................................. 15
4.2.2.2 Connection via RS-232 .............................................................................................................. 16
4.2.2.3 Connection via WLAN ................................................................................................................ 16
4.2.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 16
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 17
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU) .......................................................................... 17
4.3 VHM operating panel .......................................................................................................................... 19
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields ..................................................................................................... 20
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device .................................................................................................................... 20
4.3.1.2 Event messages ......................................................................................................................... 20
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range .................................................................................................... 20
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation ........................................................................................................................ 21
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection .......................................................................................................................... 21
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics ................................................................................................. 21
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys ........................................................................................................... 21
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation ................................................................................................... 21
4.3.2 Authorization for Control Commands ......................................................................................... 22
DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

Schenck Process Group -i-
Table of Contents
4.3.2.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation............................................. 22

4.3.2.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .......... 22
4.3.2.3 Access to Special Functions ...................................................................................................... 22
4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions ......................................................................................................... 23
4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off ............................................................................................................... 23
4.3.3.2 Set setpoint ................................................................................................................................ 24
4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint ........................................................................................................................ 24
4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter............................................................................ 25
4.3.3.5 Acknowledging Event Messages ............................................................................................... 25
4.3.4 Special Operating Functions ...................................................................................................... 25
4.3.4.1 Trend .......................................................................................................................................... 26
4.3.4.2 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation............... 28
4.3.4.3 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ........................................................................................................... 28
4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display .............................................................................................. 28
4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ................................................................................. 29
4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings .............................................................................................. 29
4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. ....................................................................... 29
4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation .......................................................................................... 29
4.3.4.9 Manual feeder control ................................................................................................................ 30
4.3.4.10 Manual control of the measuring wheel ..................................................................................... 30
4.3.5 Service Functions ....................................................................................................................... 30
4.3.5.1 Display Parameter Alterations.................................................................................................... 30
4.3.5.2 Reading and Setting Parameters ............................................................................................... 30
4.3.5.3 Setting the Clock ........................................................................................................................ 31
4.3.5.4 Reset to Factory Settings ........................................................................................................... 31
4.3.5.5 Simulation Mode ........................................................................................................................ 32
4.3.5.6 Operating the calibration functions ............................................................................................ 32
4.3.6 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ....................................................................................... 33
4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration ...................................................................................................... 33
4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ............................................................................................... 33
4.3.6.3 Setting the Display ..................................................................................................................... 33
4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) ............................................................................ 34
4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config) ....................................................................................................... 34
4.3.6.6 Configuring the Communication Path (Com) ............................................................................. 35
4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen ...................................................................................................... 36
4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) .................................................................................. 36
4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) .......................................................................................... 36
4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information ........................................................................................ 36
4.4 Calibration programs .......................................................................................................................... 37
4.4.1 Taring the Coriolis flowthrough measurement ........................................................................... 37
4.4.2 Zero-setting for the Coriolis flowthrough measurement ............................................................. 37
4.4.3 Taring the bin weigher................................................................................................................ 38
4.4.4 Bin weight control ....................................................................................................................... 39
4.4.5 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .................................................................................... 39
4.4.6 Taring the 2nd bin weigher......................................................................................................... 40
4.4.7 Second bin weight control .......................................................................................................... 40
4.4.8 Linearizing the measurement ..................................................................................................... 41
4.4.9 Automatic control measurement unit (KME) .............................................................................. 41
4.4.9.1 Types of control measurement .................................................................................................. 42
4.4.9.2 Operating the control measurement (KME) ............................................................................... 45
5 Commissioning ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
...................................................................
...................................47
BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

- ii - Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components .............................................................................................. 47

5.2 Electrical Connections ........................................................................................................................ 47
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................... 47
5.4 Entering Basic parameters ................................................................................................................ 47
5.5 MULTICOR calibration ....................................................................................................................... 48
5.6 Adjusting the flow rate regulation ....................................................................................................... 48
5.7 Check with bulk solids ........................................................................................................................ 50
5.8 Calibrating bin weighing ..................................................................................................................... 50
6 Maintenance and Recalibration ................................................................

................................................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................53
7 Parameters ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................55
7.1 Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................... 56
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 56
7.3 Configuring Event Messages.............................................................................................................. 58
7.4 Parameter List .................................................................................................................................... 59
7.4.1 Parameter Overview .................................................................................................................. 59
7.4.2 Parameter Details ...................................................................................................................... 81
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules .................................................................................. 81
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ..................................................................................... 84
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ..................................................................................... 89
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ...................................................................................... 92
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .............................................................................................. 95
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ......................................................................................... 97
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring ................................................................................... 98
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters..................................................................................................... 103
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ........................................................................................... 104
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................... 105
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ....................................................................................... 106
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................... 111
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................... 113
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ....................................................................................... 118
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ........................................................................................... 120
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval ............................................................................. 123
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................... 124
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus....................................................................... 125
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration ...................................................................... 130
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet ................................................................................................. 134
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs .......................................................................................... 134
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher ........................................................................................... 136
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller ............................................................................... 144
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Second Bin Weigher ............................................................................. 152
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Check System ....................................................................................... 158
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Tube Control ......................................................................................... 170
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Moisture................................................................................................. 172
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Additional device ................................................................................... 176
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - Pressure Compensation........................................................................ 178
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - Dead Time ............................................................................................. 182
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Process Temperature............................................................................ 184
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Safety Functions ................................................................................... 187
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Interlocking ............................................................................................ 193
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................. 196

Schenck Process Group - iii -
Table of Contents
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................ 199

7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - Data Logging ......................................................................................... 202
7.4.2.37 Parameter Block 37 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................... 204
7.4.2.38 Parameter Block 38 - Linearization .......................................................................................... 206
7.4.2.39 Parameter Block 39 - Flow Gate .............................................................................................. 207
8 Event Messages ................................................................

................................................................................................
...............................................................................................
............................................................... 211
8.1 Events Details ................................................................................................................................... 211
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration .......................................................................................................... 211
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement .......................................................................................... 213
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller ........................................................................................................... 217
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System ............................................................................................... 218
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock ............................................................................................................. 220
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow...................................................................................................... 221
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX ................................................................................................................... 223
8.1.8 Event Group: MIN .................................................................................................................... 225
8.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ......................................................................................... 227
8.1.10 Event Group: System Message ............................................................................................... 228
9 Appendix ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
.......................................... 231
9.1 Setpoint and switch-on sources........................................................................................................ 231
9.2 Block diagram: measuring the flow rate ........................................................................................... 233
9.3 The flow rate regulation .................................................................................................................... 235
9.3.1 Constant controller ................................................................................................................... 235
9.3.2 Step controller .......................................................................................................................... 240
9.4 Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................... 243
9.5 Bin weigher: Scaling and threshold value ........................................................................................ 245
9.6 Continuous bin fill level control ......................................................................................................... 246
9.7 Bin fill level regulation via feed gate ................................................................................................. 247
9.8 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ......................................................................... 250
9.9 Adjusting linearization ....................................................................................................................... 251
9.10 Correction with a known quantity...................................................................................................... 252
9.11 Controlling tube type check bins....................................................................................................... 253
9.12 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ....................................................................................... 255
9.13 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ............................................ 257
9.14 PLC Functionality (Optional)............................................................................................................. 258
9.14.1 Handling the Function Blocks................................................................................................... 259
9.14.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals .......................................................................................... 260
9.14.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals ......................................................................................... 261
9.15 Setting the Pressure Compensation ................................................................................................. 263
9.16 Safety Function for Feeding Hazardous Materials (Coal Dust) ........................................................ 265
9.17 Actuating Variable Safety Functions ................................................................................................ 266
9.18 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ................................................................................. 267
9.19 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation ....................................................................... 268
Index ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 269

- iv - Schenck Process Group
About This Manual
1 About This Manual

The operating manual for Coriolis bulk solids MULTICOR feed systems is intended both for the operat-
ing personnel and for service technicians. It describes the functionality of the VMC 20170-002 software.
The following software releases or later must be available to ensure that a DISOCONT Tersus sys-
tem will operate correctly with this software version:
▪
VHM 20170-007 → VHM operating panel
▪
VPC 20150-022 → Schenck Process EasyServe
▪
For the sake of simplicity, the DISOCONT Tersus system will also be called the weighing elec-
tronics, controller, scale or unit hereinafter.
– The BV-H2406 system manual contains information on its electronic structure.
– DISOCONT is a registered trademark of Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt.
▪
The Windows-based Schenck Process EasyServe program is a service tool for conveniently
handling continuous scales based on weighing electronics such as DISOCONT Tersus.
– For the sake of simplicity, this tool will also briefly be called EasyServe here.
– The BV-H2185 operating manual describes EasyServe's functionality.
This manual is available in different forms:

▪
A printed version
▪
An electronic document in the platform-independent ADOBE format (file ending: *.PDF)
▪
As online help in the Microsoft Windows HTMLHelp format (file ending: *.CHM)

Schenck Process Group -1-
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and material damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally you should also observe:
▪
Safety information given in order-specific documentation
▪
Safety information relating to mechanical components
▪
Instructions and safety instructions for parts manufactured by thrid-party suppliers or parts that are not
part of Schenck's scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Use
The measuring system and connected mechanical components is intended solely for weighing tasks and
related control applications. It is not intended for any other use.
Risks
If properly installed and put into service the measuring system itself does not represent a hazard.
Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Po-
tential sources of danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported or me-
tered in. Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators improperly handle
the system.
This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The operating company is fully
responsible for overall plant safety.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the tech-
nical documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instruc-
tions given.
Changing parameters
The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only personnel familiar with the device's mode
of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Parameters incorrectly set
may cause injuries or damage to the machine whenever a control system is connected. They can also ad-
versely affect weighing operation.
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating
company has to ensure safe password handling.

Safety notes
Acknowledging Event Messages

Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any
connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.
Service and Maintenance

▪
Observe any warning symbols on the scales.
▪
The measuring system must be shut down before work is performed on mechanical equipment or peri-
pheral devices (control systems in particular). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring sys-
tem cannot be inadvertently restarted.
▪
Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply (pull the plug!).
▪
The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.
Moisture and Humidity

All of the parts of the scales, particularly electrical components, must be protected from moisture and humid-
ity when the housing is open such as during service work. Observe housing protection standards.
Design Modifications
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process
voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which
could affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this require-
ment is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the
warranty will be void.
2.1 Signal Words
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

Potential hazards will always exist when working with technical devices. Hazards will arise if the machine
▪
is incorrectly installed,
▪
is started up incorrectly,
▪
is operated by untrained personnel, or
▪
is repaired by unqualified personnel.

-4- Schenck Process Group
Safety notes
In this manual the following signal words will indicate hazards that may arise when using this machine:
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the
most severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up
to and including death.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium
injuries.
2.1.2 Signal
Signal Words for Application Notes
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environ-
mental damage could occur.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product eco-
nomically and at an optimal level of efficiency.

Safety notes
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

Engineering
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems.
Once the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components.
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on
live components. Observe, among other things, the following:
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure them against inadvertent restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. Above 1 KV: earth and bypass the cables.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components
DANGER
Live damaged or defective components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are nei-
ther damaged nor defective.
1. Qualified personnel must immediately replace or, if possible, repair
damaged or defective electrical components.

General Diagram
3 General Diagram
The basic functions of the DISOCONT Tersus in combination with a feeder or measuring equipment will be
explained in this chapter.
3.1 What
What is the DISOCONT Tersus?
DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile modular electronic system for weighing and feeding technology.
Its components are:
▪
the VCU control unit ('scales controller')
▪
the VHM local operating panel
▪
Input/output expansion modules
The DISOCONT Tersus has been designed for continuous measurement and control tasks or for disconti-
nuous batching.
All weighing-related functions and process functions for measuring and feeding bulk solids are performed by
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
The DISOCONT Tersus is customizable and very flexible in terms of its physical layout and interconnection.
DISOCONT Tersus can be used in the following areas with specific software for weighing and feeding job
applications:
▪
Steel
▪
Cement production
▪
Chemical industry
▪
Foodstuffs industry
▪
Power plants
It supports the following plant systems in connection with the right mechanical equipment:
▪
Beltweighers
▪
Weighfeeders
▪
Loss-in-weight feeders
▪
Filling plants
▪
Feeders with a weighing discharge screw (MULTIFLEX)
▪
Mass flow rate measuring devices and mass flow rate feeders that operate on the basis of the Coriolis
® ®
principle (MULTICOR ) or the principle of inertia (MULTISTREAM )
DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

GmbH, Darmstadt, Germany.

General Diagram
3.2 Some definitions

Basic definitions are given in the following table.
Abbreviatio Meaning Explanation Dimension Unit

n
I Actual flow rate Material quantity per unit of time Weight/Time kg/h or t/h
Io Nominal Flow Rate Maximum gravimetric flow rate the scale is Weight/Time kg/h
designed for. Defined in the P03.03 para-
meter.
P Flow rate setpoint Preset flow rate against which the actual Weight/Time kg/h or t/h
value is controlled.
Z Flow Rate The quantity of material conveyed that is Weight kg or t
calculated from the product of flow rate and
flow time.
n Speed The speed of the measuring wheel Rotations/unit of time 1/min
Q The platform load The load of the load cell The force (weight) kg
Y Controller actuating Amperage mA
variable
Xd Control deviation The difference between the setpoint and The percent of the %
actual value with reference to the nominal nominal value
value.
Tab. 1 : Definitions for formula symbols
The abbreviations for input and output channels for use in parameterization can be found in chapter Abbrev-
iations [➙ 56].

General Diagram
3.3 Measuring principle
3.3.1 Connecting the measuring unit and electronic equipment electrically
Fig. 1: MULTICOR measuring principle
Setpoint The setpoint of the flow rate LC Load cell
Y The analog output for the controller magnitude G The speed transmitter
The mass flowthrough unit consists of a measuring wheel rotating at a constant speed that is subdivided
into chambers by specially shaped guide blades.
The bulk solids are continuously conducted centrally from above onto the distributor cone of the measuring
wheel, spun outwards by the rotation and it then slides on the stator frame shell to the lower outlet opening.
The motor is mounted to rotate and transfers the torque it yields to the LC load cells through a lever. The
output tension of the load cells is proportional to the torque and is transformed into digital information with
an analog/digital converter.
The speed of the measuring wheel is recorded with the speed transmitter G and comes into the micropro-
cessor system through a frequency/digital converter. The frequency/digital and analog/digital converter are
components of the control system.
The measurement processing system calculates the quantity of material running through per unit of time
(meaning the momentary flow rate) from the torque and speed.
This system is suited for installation in encapsulated conveying paths.

General Diagram
3.3.2 The Coriolis measuring principle
Fig. 2: The physical principle
R The radius of the measuring wheel Z The centrifugal force
R0 The impact radius C Coriolis force
LC Load cell
The material moves outwards along the guide blades due to the centrifugal force Z and exercises a force C
on it that is known as the Coriolis force. That puts the motor under stress so that it has to give off greater
torque.
Ideally, each material particle impacts the measuring wheel with the mass m and an angular momentum of 0
and leaves it with an angular momentum L of
L=m*
ω * R2
where:
m = the mass of the particle
ω = the angular speed of the wheel
R = the exterior radius of the measuring wheel
The impact radius R0 and the friction between the material and guide blades have no impact.
The change in the angular momentum equals the time integral of torque. This means that
dm/dt equals the flow rate I in kg/s, from which it in turn follows that:
M=I* ω * R2

- 10 - Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
3.4 Control operating modes

The controller can be operated in various modes if the flow rate is regulated by the control. The controller is
turned off per parameter P03.01 Control with pure measuring systems.
The following modes of operation are available to the measuring device.
▪
Gravimetric Mode (regulated)
The actual flow rate is adjusted to the setpoint. The maximum possible setpoint is the same as Nominal
Flow Rate (P03.03). An event message is generated if the input value is too large.
▪
Volumetric Mode (unregulated)
The conveyor element setting is proportional to the flow rate setpoint. Measurement of the actual flow
rate has no effect on the conveyor element adjustment. The flow rate approximately equals the specified
setpoint under nominal conditions.
The setpoint is limited to three times the nominal flow rate. An event message will be generated if this
limit is exceeded.
▪
Volumetric Synchronous Mode (unregulated)
This mode of operation is a special form of volumetric operation. It ensures a seamless transition when
switching from gravimetric to volumetric operation.
3.5 Automatic control

The weighing electronics equipment can control the material feed into the measuring equipment provided
that the regulation has been activated per parameter P03.01. The controller is turned off with pure measur-
ing systems.
Principle
The targeted and actual flow rate are compared and the difference is fed to a controller. This changes the
flow rate of the PF material feeder until the actual value is equal to the setpoint.
Material feeder
Speed-regulated PF feeders (such as feed screws and starfeeders) require an external power stage. An
external position controller or a switching mechanism for the OPEN and CLOSE directions is needed with
position-controlled feeders (such as flow gates). The equipment supplies the control signal either propor-
tional to the desired volumetric flow or the control commands for opening and closing a motor position-
controlled feeder.
3.6 Batching
In batch mode a preset quantity of material is discharged and the feeding is subsequently switched off.
Once the batch setpoint has been reached the batch operation is complete. A subsequent start command to
the feeder will begin a new charge.
Batch filling can be carried out in all modes and variants of operation.
The general procedure for batch operation is shown in the following figure:

Schenck Process Group - 11 -
General Diagram
Fig. 3: Feeding
The segments shown in the figure mean the following:

0: Start the batch with a preset batch setpoint in units of weight.
1: Interrupt batch operation by switching off the discharge element.
2: Resume the interrupted batch by switching on the feeder.
3: Automatic reduction of the flow rate towards the end of the batch.
4: End automatically once the predetermined batch quantity has been reached.
3.7 Additional Bin Weighers

DISOCONT Tersus can also capture the weight of a bin (called additional containers for the sake of simplifi-
cation). This bin can also be used for controlling and correcting continuous measurement.
This additional bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales. It is used to display
the hopper weight, register and monitor threshold levels and regulate the fill level.
It is often used to record the weight of the bin that is upstream of the continuous measuring or feeding unit in
the route.
The bin weigher is switched on by parameter P22.01 Bin Weigher Active = YES.

Operation
4 Operation
The DISOCONT Tersus and an attached weighfeeder can be operated in one of several ways:
▪
Operation under normal circumstances using one or more local VHM operating panels. The features of
the different panel versions can be found in system manual BV-H2406. The sides with the operating di-
alogs are also available via web interface for a browser .
▪
Operation using a higher-order plant control system where the control commands are either exchanged
conventionally by means of binary and analog signals or by means of a fieldbus such as PROFIBUS.
▪
Operation for service work by means of a wireless VHM operating panel.
▪
Operation for service work by EasyServe on a PC/notebook with a cable or wireless access.
▪
Local operation by means of an optional service operating level and the VLG or VMO operating units
specifically for work performed on the mechanism. The special characteristics of this operating panels
can be found in the system manual BV-H2406.
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

Once power is switched on, the DISOCONT Tersus control unit VCU starts up with a self-test. The system
states are indicated by LEDs on the unit. The significance of the indicators can be found in system manual
BV-H2406.
An optional connected VHM operating panel will start up with a self-test of the display once power has been
connected. Subsequently, it establishes communication to the VCU it was connected to last before power
was switched off.
The version number of the device will then appear for a few seconds before being replaced by the normal
display.
Notes:
▪
The following are retained during a power failure:
– Parameter settings
– Setpoints
– The status of all internal counters
– Counting pulses not yet output to external counters
– Date and time
– All important process values
▪
A specific start command is always required to begin feeding.
4.2 Operating and Control Access

DISOCONT Tersus can be operated using the following approaches:
Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

circumstances Type
VHM operating panel X X VHM touch

(permanently installed)
VHM operating panel X VHM touch
(mobile per cable or wireless)
Service operating panel for the X Foil keyboard and display
VMO drive

Operation
Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

circumstances Type
Plant main computer via Fieldbus X (X) Plant main computer

Web browser via PC X VHM with PC keyboard
Service tool X EasyServe
Tab. 2 : Operating access
DANGER
Feeding can be started using the operating panel. This switches the
drives on, allowing bulk material to flow. Before turning it on, the op-
erator has to make sure that turning it on cannot cause any damage.
Interrupting communications when operating on a non-permanent line
(pluggable cable or radio) may cause dangerous situations. There-
fore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved for ser-
vice work only.
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)

After a loss of power at the operating panel, it automatically attempts to reconnect with the scale it was con-
nected to before the power loss (after an adjustable waiting period). During this waiting period, the Feeder
operating page can be selected again to select a different scale.
If a connection has already been established, although you want to activate communication to a different
scale, you have to end the existing connection. You can do so after registering yourself as a privileged user
by pressing the Sel. Scale button.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-
established even after several attempts, the operating panel jumps into the configuration dialog.
The procedure for selecting a scales is dependent on the form of communication and is described in the
following chapters.
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable

Preconditions: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the VCU
control unit is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
You have to select the Ethernet channel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the operating pan-
el configuration.
Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches in the network for VCU control units
and shows its findings on the Feeder operating page. A button belonging a scale that is displayed is used to
select the scale and establish the data connection.
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth

Conditions: A Bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The scales
must be within transmission range. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system ma-
nual.

Operation
The Bluetooth channel has to be selected (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the configuration
of the operator panel.
Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for Bluetooth adapters within
range. Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controllers (VCUs). The outcome is
shown on the Feeder [➙ 34] operating page.
Note: A complete search for Bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is
displayed during the search. There will also be Bluetooth adapters shown to which no con-
nection can be established, either because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or
they are already otherwise connected.
You can select the scale and establish a data connection by pressing the key belonging to the scale dis-
played. It may take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown
in the header of the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: It can only establish a connection to one scale (assuming the scale is not simultaneously
connected to another Bluetooth adapter). It might be necessary to close the other connection
first. The operating panel will continue to attempt to establish a connection if another connec-
tion already exists.
If Bluetooth is used, the scales to whose Bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only
scales with which communication can be made. The Ethernet destination address may not be changed in
the VHM.
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485

Conditions: The operator panel and controller have to be in the same RS485 network. The hardware re-
quirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel (Configuring the Commu-
nication Path (Com)).
Once the transmission path has been selected, the operator panel jumps to the feeder [➙ 34] page. This is
where the address of VCU is set. The load digits of the Ethernet address (P19.07) of the scales controller
will be used again for addressing at the RS485 bus.
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communi-
cation can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking next to the ad-
dress number. Otherwise this marking will be red.
You can establish the connection to the scale with the Con.Scale button.
Note: The operating panel is the master on the bus. This is why only one operating panel may be
connected on the bus at any one time.
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet

If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using Ethernet.
Conditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an Ethernet cable to the scales network.

Operation
Note: Either use a non-coded socket of the VCU for this connection or a special (yellow) cable
when using the red-coded socket.
The EasyServe address must be in the same Ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. It might be poss-
ible to adapt the address in the scanner dialog of EasyServe. A scales can also be addressed using a router
if the network has already been configured. The scale address is input manually and not via scanner dialog.
The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork.
The easiest way to select is with the EasyServe Connection | Ethernet (Scanner) item on the menu. This
shows all of the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be adjusted here
and a connection to the scales can be established.
If the scales are connected to a different subnet, they are selected manually using Connection|Ethernet
(Manual)' and entering the scale's IP address.
4.2.2.2 Connection via RS-

RS-232
RS232 is only used to make a connection in special cases, e.g. when it is not possible to make a connection
via Ethernet. If there is a power failure to a device while a software program is being loaded, it may be ne-
cessary to establish a connection via RS232 to re-load the software.
Conditions: The PC's serial interface (COM) is connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details see
system manual BV-H2406.
Connect using the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...'.
38400 baud, 8-O-1 is the only permissible communication format. Select the COM port available at the PC
and the scale's address. The address is stored in parameter P17.01 Own Address in the scales.
Note: A software update via RS232 interface can take as much as 20 minutes. Other functions run
slower than would be usual if the connection was made using Ethernet.
4.2.2.3 Connection via WLAN

We recommend using WLAN to make a wireless connection to a scales.
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a WLAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem
has been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales.
The PC also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP
address.
In general the WLAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in
the modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN
access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet
connection were made by cable.
4.2.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth

It is more complicated to establish a connection via Bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be
accessed is the one to whose Bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Conditions: Scales and PC are equipped with Bluetooth adapters.
Establishing a connection:

Operation
1 Start the Bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.

2 Select the desired scales from the list of adapters displayed.
Note: If the name of the scales was changed it will be necessary to restart the PC in order to dis-
play the changed name.
3 Begin establishing a connection with the Bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353
4 The PC user must enter a Personal Area Network (PAN) once the connection to the Bluetooth
adapter has been established.
5 The address of the Bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by
parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
6 The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other
scales in the network cannot be addressed.
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller

controller (VCU)
Conditions:
▪
The PC is connected to the VCU via Ethernet.
▪
Java is installed on the PC and can be started.
▪
Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages to
occur.
Establishing a connection:
The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser address line. This URL is
composed of the following:
http://<address>/hmi/<display factor>.html
Item: Meaning: Possible values:

<address> VCU IP address e.g. 192.168.240.1
<display factor> Display size on the screen start
start_2x
start_3x
start_4x
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
NOTES:
▪
The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel.
▪
The field used to select a different scales and the configuration dialogs for the VHM operating panel
itself are not available.
▪
Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry keyboard is not shown on the screen.
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU)

The scales controller is equipped with a web server that provides the scale with a homepage. This is only
available in English.

Operation
Conditions: The PC can establish an Ethernet connection to the VCU.

Establishing the connection: The IP address of the VCU must be entered into the browser address line.
Various data from the scales controller can be called up on the left-hand navigation bar.
Navigation entry Function
HMI Opens at a different size the same controller interface as is in the operating panel.
HMI_2x Also refer to: Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) [➙ 17]
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Events Memory of the most recent events (such as alarms or warnings, etc.)
Parameter changes Memory of the most recent changes in parameters
Command log Logs a list of certain commands, e.g. start / stop
Totalizer hourly Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values are also available
on the VHM operating panel.
The minute of saving the data is set after the full hour in P36.01.
Totalizer daily Table of daily-saved totalizing integrators / counters
The time of saving from 00:00 h is set in P36.02.
Totalizer Table of totalizing integrators / counters saved on the command
DataLogger 1 Table of the measured values recorded. The sampling interval can be set using
DataLogger 2 P36.03. The up to 10 process variables that can be recorded are selected using
P36.04 P36.13. It begins recording when activating in the Mode operating range.
Tab. 3 : Function calls on the scales controller homepage
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are keyed in stating the entry time. The entries in the
tables are only up-dated when they are called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with
standard programs using select-copy-paste.

Operation
4.3 VHM operating panel

The DISOCONT Tersus system can be equipped with an optional VHM operating panel.
The operating panel is equipped with a touch-sensitive display (i.e., touch screen). The buttons shown
change dynamically depending on the state of the system. The keys are activated by directly touching the
screen. A touch pin or another object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used to
operate it.
The following figure shows the structure of the user interface (front view) if it is in communication with a VCU
control unit.
Fig. 4: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display
1 Name of device being controlled 5 Select details and operating keys
2 Field for event messages 6 Field for measured values and graphics
3 Select work field 7 Command and edit keys
4 On and off keys 8 Symbol indicating running operation
The [HOME] button is used to select the basic view.
Notes:
▪
VHM VCU The operating panel works in the Configuration Mode as long as it is NOT in
communication with a scale. Then the [Feeder] buttons are offered in the ‘Se-
lect the Workspace’ (3) range for selecting a scale and [Con. Scale] for estab-
lishing the connection to the scale selected.
Also refer to the Operating and Control Access Chapter.
▪
The communication to a scale has to be interrupted for adjustments to the
display such as brightness and adjusting the touch-sensitive screen. You can
call up the adjustment dialogs for the operating panel with the [Sel. Scale] but-
ton.

Operation
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device

The name of the scales to which the operating panel currently has a data connection is shown in the head-
er. The name is set as a parameter (P02.03) in the device.
4.3.1.2 Event messages

The system performs various tests. An event will be identified if there are any deviations from normal oper-
ating conditions. The way in which the device reacts to such an event can be set by parameter. The event
appears in the field for event messages.
For example:
IL06 (W1) Event: Not Ready for Start
The variables have the following significance:
IL06 Explicit, language-independent identifier for the event

W1 Event class
Event: Not Ready for Start Explanatory text
The following event classes can occur:
Class System status Display

A ALARM: Serious error. Text against a red back-
Drives had to be shut down. ground.
This message must be acknowledged before it can be cleared and the Blinking: not acknowledged
drives restarted.
Static: acknowledged
W1 WARNING 1: Irregular operation. Text against a yellow back-
This could indicate a serious error. ground.
The event did not stop material conveying. Acknowledge the message to Blinking: not acknowledged
clear it.
Static: acknowledged
W2 WARNING 2: Irregular operation.
This could indicate a serious error.
The event did not stop material conveying. The message will be cleared
automatically once the event is no longer pending.
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range

The selection on the right offers the following operating fields:
Field Function User
HOME Operation and display for normal operation System operating personnel
Trend Illustration of the transient behavior of process sig- System operating personnel
nals Service personnel
Values Process and measured values System operating personnel
Service personnel

Operation
Field Function User

Setup Special display and operation for setup, diagnostics Service personnel
and service
Login Login for privileged access Service personnel
Help Indication of program versions; System operating personnel
Cleaning of monitor display Service personnel
Sel. Scale Connect to a different scales Service personnel
Some functions are not available to non-privileged users. Beyond this, access to some func-
tions can be switched off per parameter.
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation

The feeder drive can be switched on and off with the keys in this field if the mode of operation and the pa-
rameterization permit it.
WARNING
A start signal will actuate the motors!
There is a risk of injury to people standing within range of the motors. Bulk
material can be transported and may overwhelm downstream components.
The stop signal is not an emergency stop, but rather will stop the facility
normally.
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection

Different screens in a work field can be selected by using the keys in the lower area. The key used often to
acknowledge event messages is available in most displays. Further pages can be called up with the arrow
keys. Key allocation varies between the fields. An overview of the function tree can be seen in section Op-
erating Fields and Function Calls.
Access to individual functions can be limited when setting up the system to privileged user groups.
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics

Depending on the page selected, current measured values and graphical representations of the mechanical
system and signals are displayed here. Input boxes, e.g. for a setpoint or parameter value, are shown
'recessed'.
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys

Other buttons can be overlaid for special functions in area (7) above the lower detail selection (5). The keys
shown vary with the detail selection in the respective work field. The function of these keys is described in
the relative function sections.
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation

The symbol for a running feed in the upper-left corner indicates the state of the main drive. A rotating rec-
tangle will be displayed when device is switched on. This symbol appears on all display pages.

Operation
4.3.2 Authorization for Control Commands

There are many ways to restrict the entry of control commands to certain users only. The system supports
setting special conditions using a range of methods.
4.3.2.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation

The scales are usually operated in normal operation during production. The entry points (sources) for
operation under normal conditions are determined by parameter. The scales can be turned on and setpoints
altered from these sources only.
Parameters Name and signal
P04.01 Feeder Start

P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source
Tab. 4 : Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation
Sources for operation under normal conditions can be set for entry at the scales operating panel during ser-
vice work. This mode is called keyboard mode. The VHM operating panel and the analog operating soft-
ware that can be started via a web browser from the scales control homepage are considered to be operat-
ing panels. In keyboard mode the service software tool 'EasyServe' can also be used to control the scales.
4.3.2.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Moni-
Moni-
toring
The system can be configured so that normal operation is accessible only to devices with IP addresses that
have been specified by parameters. The corresponding parameters can be found in the parameter group
'Dialog Behaviour' (P02.04 … P02.10).
Operation via 'EasyServe' is not affected by the parameter setting.
The connection to the operating devices with specified addresses can be monitored so that the scales can
be returned to a safe state in case of a malfunction.
4.3.2.3 Access to Special Functions

Access to special functions can be restricted by parameters. The following alternatives can be selected by
these parameters grouped according to control command:

Operation
'active' Command not restricted. The command may always be called up at the scales
operating panel.
'not active' This command is never allowed. The relevant key is not shown at the operating
panel making it impossible to execute the command.
'Password' This command is accessible only after logging on with password 1. Password 1
is variable and can be changed using P02.12.
This password is principally intended for service access. The basic system set-
tings are always made using this password.
'2nd Password' This command is accessible only after logging on with password 2. Password 2
is variable and can be changed using P02.13.
The parameters for defining access authorizations are in the group of Dialog Behaviour (P02.14 ... P02.23)
parameters. If the user has not registered with sufficient privileges for the desired function, the operating
button appears as non-active (grey) with a star in the lower right-hand corner.
The operating company is responsible for assuring that the passwords are known to those personnel only
who are to receive authorization for the respective control command. The control functions are released
once the user has logged on with the Login key and has entered the password. The Logout key should be
used to log off the privileged user from the system once work has been completed. The unit falls back by
itself into the non-privileged operating mode after the time set on the operating panel (refer to Setting the
Display [➙ 33]) .
However, the control commands can always be executed via EasyServe regardless of the
parameter setting.
4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions

This section will describe operation under normal conditions.
Access to certain operating functions can be restricted when setting up the system. They will then be no
longer accessible or accessible with a keyword only. This chapter will describe the complete and unre-
stricted functional range.
4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off

Condition
▪
No alarm may be pending.
▪
The all-clear must be given by discharging elements, in as far as any are connected. Event IL-01 Event:
Run Disabled will be sent if no all-clear is given.
▪
The on switch at the operating panel must be activated. This is the case in keyboard or in normal mode
if the source of the on pulse in P04.01 has been set to 'OP'.
Turning on feeding
▪
Press the ON key.
Display during running feed
▪
Running arrow in the graphical display.
▪
ON appears in the graphical display.
▪
A moving symbol appears in the upper left border.
Turning off feeding
▪
Press the OFF key.

Operation
Scales will be switched off. Flow rate measurement will cease after the time set in parameter P06.02 has
elapsed.
Display during stopped feed
OFF appears in the graphical display. Moving displays are turned off.
4.3.3.2 Set setpoint

Condition
▪
Keyboard mode selected, or
▪
Normal mode selected and P04.02 = 'OP'
The setpoint will be displayed in a data-entry frame if it can be altered.
How to Enter the Setpoint
1. Call up the HOME operating page.
2. Press the entry frame, the entry field will open.
3. Clear the old value with the [C] button and key in the value.
4. Complete entry by pressing OK or exit by pressing EXIT.
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.03 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint

With the relative setpoint Pr, an externally set setpoint Pe can be expressed as a percent. This function is
used to enter a portion of additives, with the command variable being measured.
Conditions
The P04.07 parameter = AI or OP
The effective setpoint for the control is calculated using the following formula:
P = Pe × Pr / 100 %
P = effective setpoint
Pe = External setpoint
Pr = Relative setpoint
It is entered the same way as an absolute setpoint (Set setpoint [➙ 24]).
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.03 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.

Operation
4.3.3.4
4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter
The DISOCONT Tersus has three totalizing counters that sum up the measured bulk material quantity.
Counters 1 and 2 can be reset. Counter 3 cannot be reset. The counters do not have any independent over-
flow.
How to reset a totalizing counter
Press the Totals button, then press the button for zero setting the desired counter and confirm the com-
mand.
HINT
Other ways to reset the counters
The system can be configured to allow the counters to be reset by means
of an electrical signal. All counters will still be able to be reset via the field-
bus interface by the main computer. All reset commands work
independently of one another.
4.3.3.5 Acknowledging
Acknowledging Event Messages
All of the important functions are monitored. An event message is generated if a malfunction occurs. This
will be displayed in the message field. The event with the highest priority will be displayed if several events
should occur.
The order of priorities is: Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2).
HINT
Displaying earlier events
To display older events, open the 'Values' screen and select 'Event Log'.
Earlier events can be called up using the navigation keys in the event field.
The list of events can also be viewed via web server and can be exported
for an external evaluation.
How to Acknowledge an Error Message
DANGER
Event messages indicate unusual and/or dangerous states.
For reasons of safety, the causes of any malfunctions must be corrected
before an event message is acknowledged.
To acknowledge an event message press the 'Ack Event' key, available on many screens e.g. in 'HOME'.
Once acknowledged, any blinking messages will be displayed continuously. When the cause of the malfunc-
tion has been corrected the event will be cleared from the message line but can be displayed again using
'EreignisLog'.
A troubleshooting list can be found in section Event Messages.
4.3.4 Special Operating

Operating Functions
This section will describe the functions used for normal operation in special cases. If not stated otherwise,
the text will assume that the work field HOME has been selected (Selecting the operating range [➙ 20]).

Operation
4.3.4.1 Trend
The trend is a graphical depiction on the VHM operating panel of the course of process values over time.
HINT
It is easier with EasyServe
EasyServe allows you to adjust trend depictions much more comfortably
and to export measured data. The trend in the VHM is intended to offer
permanent and simple trend depiction.
The trend depiction, stored values from previous weighings and the configuration of the trend will be deleted
if the operating panel suffers a power failure or if it connects to a different scales.
Button Function
<< Open older values into the display window, large increments
< Open older values into the display window, small increments
> Open more recent values into the display window, small increments
>> Open more recent values into the display window, large increments
Settings Enter the configuration dialog (see below)
Z- Increase time period shown
Z+ Decrease time period shown
Tab. 5 : Control keys
Setting the Trend Display

The configuration window appears after 'Settings' is pressed.
Fig. 5: Lines configuration
The process values selected for display are shown in the left table (1). The first time it is called up the list
will be empty.
In order to configure the display of a value, click on the value in table 1 to select it. This will show the value's
reference number (ID), its thresholds and the color of the line. Touching fields (3) to (5) will open the corres-
ponding adjustment dialog box.

Operation
Button Function
Remove Delete the values selected in (1) and (2).
Back Close the configuration window and return to the trend display. Altered settings will not
be activated.
Update Activate the configuration shown for the trend depiction.
Add Open the dialog to select the value to be displayed.
Tab. 6 : Keys in the lines configuration
Fig. 6: Selection dialog for process values
Click on a value in list (5) to select it. The properties of the trend line are transferred to the right-hand col-
umn, the reference number (ID) shown in field (4).
The value is transferred with the keys 'Add' or 'New' into list 1 of the values to be displayed.
Process value ID Process variable Dimension
1872 Measured actual flow rate kg/h

1874 Totalizing counter 1 kg
1876 Totalizing counter 2 kg
1886 Speed 1/min
1890 Surge hopper fill level kg
1894 Effective setpoint kg/h
1904 Control deviation % of rated capacity
Tab. 7 : Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5)
The characteristic value (ID) of any given process value can be entered in ID field (4). Possible values can
be found in the fieldbus data description. The 'Back' key closes the window in which values are selected and
returns to the value configuration menu.

Operation
4.3.4.2 Volumetric / (Volumetric

(Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Opera-
Opera-
tion
The flow rate regulator can be operated in different modes of operation.
Gravimetric operation:
The actual flow rate value in units of weight per time is adjusted to the preset setpoint.
The maximum possible setpoint is the same as the nominal flow rate (P03.03). The message SC1 'Event:
Setpoint Limited' is generated if greater entries are made.
Volumetric operation:
Material discharge is adjusted proportional to the setpoint; the weight of the hopper has no effect on the
regulator output. This mode of operation can be required if the weight measurement is subjected to a lot of
disturbance and if the loss in weight per unit of time is not a reliable measure of the discharge capacity.
Under nominal conditions the flow rate approximately corresponds to the preset setpoint.
The setpoint is limited to the threefold nominal flow rate (P03.03). The message SC1 'Event: Setpoint Li-
mited' is generated if greater entries are made. The actual flow rate value in units of weight per time is
measured, but has no effect on the control.
Volumetric synchronous operation:
This mode of operation is the same as volumetric operation but ensures a smooth transition from gravime-
tric operation by taking into consideration the mean regulator output value calculated during gravimetric
operation.
Setting regulator mode
Press the 'Mode' key followed by 'Rate Control'. Press the key with the desired selection.
Display
The mode of operation is indicated in the overview page graphical representation by the identifiers 'GRAV',
'VOL' and 'VOL S'.
4.3.4.3 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF

You can use the Keyboard mode function place the preselected operating sources for switching on/off, for
specifying the setpoint and the source for the batch setpoint onto the keyboard of the VHM operating panel.
The previous sources will take effect if keyboard mode is deactivated. Since operating via Easy-
Serve corresponds to operating with the keyboard on the operating unit, this switch also has an impact on
operating via EasyServe.
Note: When switching to keyboard from an external source (e.g. serial fieldbus), the ON/OFF status of the
scales, the setpoint and the batch setpoint are maintained. The external signals are effective when switching
in the opposite direction.
How to set up keyboard mode
Pressing the Mode buttons, changing to the second display page via arrow key and Keyboard mode there.
Display
The ON, OFF' buttons and the setpoint input space are visible in the keyboard mode. These fields are only
visible in normal mode if the operating sources have been set to the operating panel (OP).
4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display

The touchscreen is deactivated for a set period of time to allow the display to be cleaned. No acidic or
strongly abrasive cleaning agents may be used. During cleaning, a clock will count down from 20 seconds to
zero. The screen will remain white during this time with the exception of the progress indicator. This allows
defective pixels to be spotted. The touchscreen will be automatically reactivated once the time has elapsed.

Operation
How to initiate cleaning mode

Press the 'Help' key followed by 'Clean:'.
4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors')

The event with the highest priority will permanently be displayed in the corresponding display line. Press the
'Values' key followed by 'Event Log' to display older events or events of lower priority. Other events can then
be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of events is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comfortably displayed or
downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries
(in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings

The readings of the totalizing counters can be stored cyclically. The stored values are available as a at the
operating panel and in list form in the web browser.
Press the Values button and then Total Log button display them on the operating panel. Individual entries
can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (in as far as so many
entries have already been made).
4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations.

Press the Values button and then the Param Log button to show changes in parameters. Previous altera-
tions can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of parameter alterations is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comforta-
bly displayed or downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the
previous 500 entries (in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher:

Weigher: Display and Operation
The measured values of the additional bin weigher are displayed in a separate screen. It is only possible to
display this when the bin weigher is activated via P22.01 Bin Weigher Active.
To open the display:
Press the Surge Bin button.
You can not only see the current bin weight, but also the limits set per parameter. The parameters can be
adapted right on the screen if you register with sufficient privileges.
Parameters No. Meaning
Bin Level MAX P22.18 Upper threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if exceeded.
Control Level MAX P22.13 Fill level at which the filling will be stopped.
Control Level MIN P22.12 Filling is started if the fill level falls below this threshold.
Bin Level MIN P22.15 Lower threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if level falls
below this level.
Tab. 8 : Bin weigher parameters

Operation
Button Effect
Auto The filling is regulated automatically by means of the threshold values 'Control Level MIN'
and 'Control Level MAX' set.
Manual The filling of the hopper is controlled by the operator using the keys 'Start' and 'Stop'. For
reasons of safety filling is automatically stopped if the limit 'Control Level MAX' is ex-
ceeded.
Start Begin filling the hopper.
Stop End filling the hopper.
Tab. 9 : Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level
Refer to Adjustment Functions for information on adjusting the bin weigher.
4.3.4.9 Manual feeder control

The feeder dosing into the measuring unit is automatically started and stopped in the switch-on sequence of
feeding. The automatic control can be interrupted and the feeder blocked for service purposes. The control
command can be reached from the HOME figure through the Mode and then Prefeeder button.
4.3.4.10 Manual control of the measuring wheel

The measuring wheel will be automatically started in the switch-on sequence of feeding, although it can also
be set to permanent running or afterflow after turning off feeding. It is adjusted with P03.02 Wheel Continous
Operation. However, the measuring wheel can also be manually controlled for service purposes. Since it
cannot be operated with the measuring wheel standing still, the feeder is logically turned off. The control
command can be reached from the HOME figure with the Mode and then the Loadwheel button. The mea-
suring wheel starts automatically with the next switch-on command or with the manual control command.
4.3.5 Service Functions

The functions described here are as a rule used only for system setup, troubleshooting or to alter the control
properties.
Some functions are accessible only to privileged users who have logged onto the controller (also refer to:
Operating Fields and Function Calls).
4.3.5.1 Display Parameter Alterations

Changes made to parameters are archived in the system. Press the 'Values' key followed by 'Param Log' to
display the stored values. Previous values can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
4.3.5.2 Reading and Setting Parameters

The control program was structured such that no programing knowledge is necessary to adapt the system to
local conditions. Parameters define the properties. The meaning of the parameters can be found in the de-
tailed parameter description in section 'Parameters'.
Call up: Setup button and then Parameter button
Parameters that require frequent changes due to bulk material changes are summarized in Selection.
You can access all parameters via All.
The parameters are structured in blocks to give a better overview. parameters are composed as follows:
Pxx.yy <Text>, where: xx: Block number

yy: Number of the parameter in the block
<Text> Explanatory name of the parameter (language-dependent)

Operation
Depending on the situation, individual parameters or groups of parameters may be faded

out to highlight the parameters important to an application. Hidden parameters can only be
shown via EasyServe and activated there for the display on the VHM operating panel whe-
rever necessary. The fading out may result in breaks in the numbering. Some parameters
can be write protected. The write protection can also be configured using EasyServe.
NOTE: The following description applies to a visible and write unprotected parameter accessed by a user
with sufficient user privileges.
The parameter group is displayed and selected in the upper part of display area 6 (see VHM operating pan-
el [➙ 19]). Use the arrow keys to scroll through the groups. Individual parameters in a group can be se-
lected in the lower half of display area 6.
A parameter can be selected directly with the keyboard symbol.
The value of the parameter is shown in display area 7 (see VHM operating panel [➙ 19]) of the command
and edit keys.
The Edit button calls up the dialog for changing the selected parameters. The parameter's identifier will ap-
pear in the focus of the upper part of display area 6 and its current value in the lower part. Depending on the
type of parameter the arrow keys can be used either to assign a new value to the parameter or a value can
be entered for it. A changed value is written into the parameter via Store resident. An alternative is discard-
ing the change with the Exit or Back button. In the latter case the parameter value will remain unchanged.
4.3.5.3 Setting the Clock

DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues run-
ning for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The
clock buffer is maintenance-free.
The time is recorded in the process value logs.
How to set the clock:
Press the Setup button and then Set Time.
The current values for date and time appear in display space 6 (refer to VHM operating panel [➙ 19]).
Touch the entry field to open an entry dialog. Either touch the screen or use the arrow keys to move the
cursor in the entry field. Finish the procedure and change the time with [OK]. The dialog is exited via Cancel
without changing the clock.
4.3.5.4 Reset to Factory Settings

DISOCONT Tersus has three independent sets of parameters:
Parameter set Usage Load procedure at the operating panel.
Active parameter set Set controller behaviour Individual parameter values can be altered (see
Reading and Setting Parameters [➙ 30]).
Backup set Pre-prepared parameter set for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Custom'
certain applications or settings you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
after commissioning meter set.
Factory settings Unalterable set of parameters for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Factory'
the basic configuration you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
meter set.
Tab. 10 : Parameter sets: Usage and activation

Operation
WARNING
Irretrievable loss of adjusted parameters
Loading the backup parameter set or the factory settings will overwrite all of
the parameters in the active parameter set. The overwrite cannot be re-
versed. We recommend you to use EasyServe to save a copy of the cur-
rent parameter set to the PC drive before overwriting.
4.3.5.5 Simulation Mode

For commissioning, the DISOCONT Tersus can simulate important process values for training and test pur-
poses without starting aggregates and without requiring all sensors to be connected. Load and speed values
are simulated internally.
WARNING
Output signals are set in simulation mode. This allows externally
connected motors to start. The system will show that material is flow-
ing.
The starting motors may represent a hazard. The on signal can activate
systems upstream of the feeder whether the feeder is prepared to receive
the bulk material or not.
Selecting simulation mode:

Press the keys 'Setup, right arrow and then 'Simulation'.
4.3.5.6 Operating the calibration functions

DISOCONT Tersus offers a range of calibration functions to facilitate commissioning and changing bulk
material. All functions are operated according to the same principles. The Adjustment Functions Chapter
summarizes the individual functions, what is required for them and their results.
To call up: Press the 'Setup' key followed by 'Calibration' and 'Programs “
Use the arrow keys to select and display the name of the program in the upper part of display area 6 (see
VHM operating panel [➙ 19]). Operating information will also appear here.
Further information and program results are shown in the lower part of the display area.
The keys in area 7 of the display are used for operation (see VHM operating panel [➙ 19]).
Button Function
Start Run the selected program

Apply Transfer the results to the parameter and end the program
Cancel Discard the results and abort the program. Programs can be aborted at any time.
Tab. 11 : Keys for the calibration programs

Operation
4.3.6 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel

The operating panel configuration is autonomous of the scales configuration. The operating panel has a
proprietary set of parameters stored in the operating panel itself only. These parameters can be accessed
by means of a special dialog. User prompts in the configuration dialog are always in English, regardless of
the language set for the scales.
4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration

Once power to the system has been switched on, the operating panel will show 'VHM-SPG' in the headline
of the display. Open the operating panel configuration dialog by pressing any key other than [Con.Scales].
▪
Alternatively: If the operating panel is already displaying a scales' operating pages, the configuration
dialog can be opened with the 'Sel. Scale' key without requiring the supply voltage to be switched off
and on (Operating Fields and Function Calls).
The adjustment ranges are called up with the keys in area 3 [➙ 20] of the display. Some functions are
accessible only to privileged users.
Button Function Password
protected
VHM addr. Set the VHM IP address Yes

Display Set the display parameters Yes
Feeder Select the scales to which a connection is to be established
Config Detailed adjustment of the scales' web server homepage Yes
Com Set the path for communication with the scales Yes
Calibration Adjust touchscreen entry
Login Login for privileged users
Con.Scales Connect to a scales
Help Display software version
Disable touchscreen to clean display
Tab. 12 : Keys in the VHM configuration dialog
4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.)

Every device in the communication network must have a unique address. The VHM address is set in the
configuration dialog with the key 'VHM addr.'. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 36].
Field Meaning Factory settings
IP Unique IP address in the scales controller subnetwork (VCU). 192.168.240.21

The last group of digits in the IP address is also the unit's address
when communicating through the local bus.
Subnet Subnetwork template 255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address of the gateway to other networks 0.0.0.0
Tab. 13 : Fields for setting the address
4.3.6.3 Setting the Display

The 'Display' key opens the dialog for adjusting the display settings. The key is accessible only to a user
with privileged access [➙ 36].

Operation
Button Parameter Function Factory settings
Inactivity Inactivity timeout Length of time from the most recent activity until the bright- 20 min
timeout ness of the screen is automatically reduced. The screen will
return to normal brightness once the screen is touched. This
contact will not be interpreted as communication with the
scales.
Logout timeout Length of time from the most recent entry before a privileged 600 min
user is automatically logged out of the system security rea-
sons.
Working Display brightness during operation. At full brightness the display has a life expectancy of approximately
brightness 5 years. This expectancy can be increased to over 10 years by dimming the brightness a little.
Sleeping Brightness after a longer period with no activity.
brightness Note: If the display touchscreen is not to be used and the display is intended to be permanently fully
legible, the sleeping brightness can be set to the same level as the operating brightness.
Save Save the changes made. Changes are discarded without prompting if they were not saved beforehand.
Tab. 14 : Parameters for the display
4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder)

(Feeder)
The display shows the scales available in the network. Scales are selected by means of its corresponding
key.
Button Function
Buttons beside Select the scales

an entry
Configure Configure the scales by entering:
Scales name
IP address
Subnetwork mask
Gateway
Note: This functions allows the IP address of a VCU to be set without using EasyServe. The
addresses of the VHM and the VCU are generally in the same subnetwork.
The 'Back' key will discard the changes.
The 'Save' key will save the changes.
Tab. 15 : Keys in the list of scales
4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config)

As with a web browser, the homepage of the scales' user interface must also be specified. The key is ac-
cessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 36].

Operation
Parameter / Key Function Factory settings
URL of homepage Address of the scales' web server homepage. A web http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
browser on a PC can open the scales' user interface
at this address.
Under normal circumstances the scales are selected
on the 'Feeder' page. The start address is entered
automatically.
Communication will be automatically established to
the last address entered here once power resumes
after a power failure.
Start timeout Length of time between command to connect to a 7s
scales and the start of connection. This period can
be used to access the operating panel configuration
[➙ 33].
Save Save the settings. The entries are discarded if they
are not saved before the page is left.
Tab. 16 : Setting startup routine
4.3.6.6 Configuring
Configuring the Communication Path (Com)
Select the medium of communication here. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 36].
Selection Function Remarks Factory settings
Ethernet Communication via Ethernet interface and The complete IP address of the x
the RJ45 plug. scales will be used when selected.
Bluetooth Communication via Bluetooth will be auto- All Bluetooth adapters within range
matically activated if a Bluetooth adapter is are listed in the 'Feeder' selection.
connected (wireless interface for portable Each scales must be equipped with its
devices). own adapter. Scales connected to
each other via Ethernet can commu-
nicate via Bluetooth only to the scales
to whose adapter the operating panel
has been connected.
A subordinate IP connection is estab-
lished in a separate subnetwork.
Therefore the IP subnetwork address
displayed in the VHM differs from the
scales' subnetwork address stored in
the parameter.
RS485 Communication via serial interface The last part of the scales' IP address
(1 ... 254) will be used when selected.
The IP address must therefore also
be set when using an interface of this
kind.
Tab. 17 : Alternatives
The select scales page will automatically open if the communication path is changed. The scales stores its
addresses in a parameter.
Details on possible alternative cablings of operating panel and scales are described in the system manual
BV-H2406.

Operation
4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen

The touch sensitive screen is calibrated in relation to the display using this function. Calibration is required if
a key is unintentionally depressed when a neighboring key is touched or if a function can only be activated
by pressing the area next to the key on the screen.
Once the 'Start' button has been pressed, you will be prompted to touch points on the screen marked with a
cross. The calibration will be automatically stored once this has been successfully performed. The proce-
dure is automatically repeated if faults are identified during the adjustment.
The adjustment is always called up during the start procedure once the software is loaded into the VHM.
Note:
A touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used. The adjustment
should be made with an object that is as similar as possible to the one that will be used in subsequent nor-
mal operation.
4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout)

Some of the operating panel settings are protected against unauthorized access. Access is available only to
users with access privileges.
The keyword is: 7353
The keyword cannot be changed and is independent of the scales' keyword settings.
4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale)

The operating panel will begin working normally once communication has been established to a scales. The
operating panel will wait [➙ 34] for a period after the 'Con.Scale' key is pressed and then try via the confi-
gured path [➙ 34] to connect to the scales that was selected on the 'Feeder' [➙ 34] page. The attempt will
be repeated several times. If the scales cannot be reached at that address the program will branch to the
'Feeder' scales selection.
The connection attempt can be interrupted by pressing another key and the configuration dialog for the op-
erating panel can be called up again. The routine is also called up if the system is restarted after a power
failure.
4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information

The key 'Help' opens a window with information on the software version and with basic scales controller
settings 'Feeder' (VCU) and operating panel settings 'VHM'. These data and if possible the Easy-
Serve parameter file should be kept at hand if making an inquiry to Schenck Process.
The serial number of the controller VCU also appears in the EasyServe scanner. It can be used to identify
the VCU in the network if erroneous, non-unique IP addresses have been assigned.
'FCB Variant:' is the designation for the loaded variant of the function block links [➙ 258]. 'FCB Variant:'
'Empty' refers to the state with no expanded functions, which is the state described in this manual.
The 'Clean:' key switches the operating panel into cleaning mode for a short time. A counter will appear on
the display and count down the time remaining until the panel returns to normal. Touch entry is deactivated,
allowing the screen to be touched for cleaning without inadvertently giving a command.

Operation
4.4 Calibration programs

DISOCONT Tersus simplifies start-up with the aid of calibration functions. They store their findings in para-
meters, thus adapting the control to the application. All parameters that arise from the design of the scales
and the electrical connections must be set before the calibration functions are called up.
As a rule the calibration functions are accessible only to privileged users. They first have to register in the
system (Operating Fields and Function Calls). The calibration functions can be called up both on the VHM
operating panel (Operating the calibration functions [➙ 32]) and via EasyServe. They can also be operated
via the fieldbus connection, in as far as one has been activated (P18.01).
4.4.1 Taring the Coriolis flowthrough measurement

The 'TW: Tare' calibration program records through the load that can be adjusted in time P10.05 (Factory :
30s) on the load cell without flowing bulk solids. This value is used to correct the measuring results in opera-
tion with bulk solids. The flow rate display fluctuates around zero after taring.
In contrast to the zero setting program, the zero setting range is not monitored or limited with taring. The
tare program deletes the findings of the the zero setting program.
Condition The mass flow metering unit has to be turned off. This closes any material feeder.
Batching operation may not be active.
The measuring wheel has to be running.
To call up Call up the 'TW: Tare' calibration program
Program runtime The runtime is determined by P10.05
Display while running The remaining running time of the program in % of the value in P10.05
The tare measured in percent of the value in P05.06
Display when finished The tare deviation with reference to the previous tare of P10.02 in % of P10.02
Recently determined tare in percent of the rated load cell load (P05.06)
Parameters changed New value of tare in P10.02
when results are accepted The P10.03 parameters will be set to zero
Potential events and 'Stop !': Switch off feeding (feeder) (refer to the conditions)
messages 'Aborted !': One condition was not met during the measurement and the calibration pro-
gram was ended.
'Batch active': Reject batching for calibration (refer to the conditions)
'Measuring wheel ON': The measuring wheel has to be running since it has an impact on
tare.
Tab. 18 : The details and process of taring
4.4.2 Zero-
Zero-setting for the Coriolis flowthrough measurement
The '>0< Zero Set' program calibrates the zero point of flow rate measurement just like the 'TW: Tare' pro-
gram. However, the results is ascertained relative to the basic adjustment and cannot be accepted if the
deviation from the basic adjustment is greater than the limit adjusted in P10.04.

Operation
Condition The mass flow metering unit has to be turned off. This closes any material feeder.
Batching operation may not be active.
The measuring wheel has to be running.
To call up Call up the '>0< Zero Set' calibration program
Program runtime The runtime is determined by P10.05
Display while running '>0< active': remaining running time of the program in % of the value in P10.05
The deviation of tare from the basic adjustment in percent of the value in P05.06
Display when finished The tare deviation with reference to the previous tare of P10.02 in % of P10.02
Recently determined tare in percent of the rated load cell load (P05.06)
Parameters changed The new value of the tare correction in P10.03
when results are accepted
Potential events and 'Stop !': Switch off feeding (feeder) (refer to the conditions)
messages 'Aborted !': One condition was not met during the measurement and the calibration pro-
gram was ended.
'Batch active': Reject batching for calibration (refer to the conditions)
'Measuring wheel ON': The measuring wheel has to be running since it has an impact on
tare.
Tab. 19 : The details and process of zero setting
4.4.3 Taring the bin weigher

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P22.01.
The TB: Tare calibration program records the load on the weighing equipment for the empty bin. In opera-
tion with bulk solids, this value is subtracted from the measured bin weight. When the bin is empty, the dis-
play of the weight value fluctuates around zero after taring.
The details and course of the calibration program:
Condition The bin should be empty.

The bin filling may not be activated.
To call up Select and start the TB: Tare calibration program
Program runtime 10 s
display when running 'TB: active': the program's remaining time
The current tare load in percent of P22.04
Display when finished Deviation in percent of the rated load cell load as per P22.04
Tare in percent of the rated load cell load as per P22.04
Potential events and 'Aborted !' :

messages The program was aborted. The parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 20 : The details and process of taring for the bin weigher

Operation
4.4.4 Bin weight control

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P22.01.
The CB: Weight Check calibration program is used for checking and adjusting the weighing equipment with
the aid of a known calibration weight. The mass of the calibration weight used should be keyed into P22.25
before program start.
This program can identify shunt forces, i.e. links between the weighed and static components that absorb
forces that cannot be captured with the load cell.
Condition The bin may not be filled or emptied.

The mass of the calibration weight was entered into P22.25.
To call up Select and start the CB: Weight Check calibration program
Program runtime
display when running The first thing is calculating the bin's current weight.
The display of the remaining period and current weight.
Then the Checkweight Up/Down prompt and value of the calibration weight appear.
Now apply or remove the calibration weight and press the <<Next>> button.
The display of the remaining period and the difference to the first weight value. The value
shown is negative if the calibration weight has been removed.
The second weight value is now taken and checked for plausibility.
Display when finished Set/Act shows the quotient from the change in mass entered in P22.25 and the measured
change in mass.
Parameters changed Enter in P22.24
when results are accepted P22.24new = P22.24old * 'Set/Act'
Potential events and Aborted !:

messages The program was finished. The parameters remain unchanged.
Tab. 21 : The details and process of checking the weight of the bin weigher
4.4.5 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation

This function is only available when weight calculation has been activated for the bin via P22.01 and the
level controller has been activated in P23.01.
The BIN: Controller Optimization bin controller optimization program automatically calculates the KP and TN
control parameters (P23.08 and P23.09) of the bin level controller from the conveying element constant of
the filling or emptying element in P23.06 and the dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the
bin in P23.07.
Condition The conveying element constant of the filling or emptying element entered into P23.06.
The dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the bin into P23.07
To call up Select and start the BIN: Controller Optimization calibration program

Operation
display when running CO: P-Component = recently calculated parameters P23.08

I-Component TN = recently calculated parameters P23.09
Parameters changed Recently calculated values are entered into P23.08 and P23.09. The parameters are au-
when results are accepted tomatically accepted without taking further action.
Potential events and Aborted !:
messages The program was finished. The parameters remain unchanged.
Feeder Constant:
The P23.06 parameter has an incorrect value (P23.06 = 0.0 (kg/h)/mA). The program is
canceled.
Tab. 22 : The details and process of improving bin level regulation
NOTE: The calculated values of the parameters in P23.08 and P23.09 can be further adapted ma-
nually. The optimization program does not have any impact on the rest of the parameters of
the bin level controller (such as D portion, bypass and lift, etc.).
4.4.6 Taring the 2nd bin weigher

This program is only available when the second bin weigher is activated through P24.01 Second Bin
Weigher Active.
The TSBW: Tare calibration program records the load on the weighing equipment with the empty bin. This
value is subtracted from the measured bin weight in operation with bulk solids. When the bin is empty, the
display of the weight value fluctuates around zero after taring.
Condition The bin should be empty.

The bin filling may not be activated.
To call up Call up the TSBW: Tare calibration program
Display while running TB: active and the remaining running time of the program
Display when finished Deviation in % with reference to the previous value of tare in P24.27
Tare in % of the rated load in P24.06
Potential events and 'Aborted !': The program was aborted. The parameters remain unchanged.
messages
Tab. 23 : The details and process of taring the 2nd bin weigher
4.4.7 Second bin weight control

The calibration program is only available when the second bin weigher was activated via P24.01 Second Bin
Weigher Active.
The CSBW: Weight Check program is used for checking the weighing equipment with the aid of a known
test weight. The mass of the calibration weight used should be keyed into P24.28 before program start.
The program can be used to identify shunt forces, i.e. links between the weighed and static components that
absorb forces that cannot be captured with the load cell.

Operation
Condition The bin may not be filled or emptied.

The mass of the calibration weight was entered into P24.28 Calibration Weight.
To call up Call up the CSBW: Weight Check calibration program
Display while running The first thing is calculating the bin's current weight.
The display of the remaining period and current weight.
Then the Checkweight Up/Down prompt and the value of the calibration weight appears.
Now place or remove the calibration weight and press the Start button.
The display of the remaining period and the difference to the first weight value. The value
shown is negative if the calibration weight has been removed.
The second weight value is now taken and checked for plausibility.
Display when finished Set/Act shows the quotient from the change in mass entered in P24.28 and the measured
change in mass
Parameters changed Enter in P24.26
when results are accepted P24.26 new = P24.26 old * Set/Act
Potential events and Aborted ! : The program was closed. The parameters remain unchanged.
messages
Tab. 24 : The details and process of checking the weight of the 2nd bin weigher
4.4.8 Linearizing the measurement

The measured value can have a non-linear dependancy on the real value depending upon the geometry of
the measuring wheel.
However, this correlation can be compensated for by linearizing in theLinearization block. The geometry
parameters relevant to the measurement have to be calibrated and taring [➙ 37] has to be carried out be-
fore adjusting linearization. The sensitivity should have been calibrated via P10.01.
Control measurements [➙ 50] are made at varying flow rates Sk for linearization. The rate Sk can be calcu-
lated from the Unlin. Flow Rate service value in percent of the flow rate entered in P03.03. This value might
differ from the flow rate shown as the actual flow rate depending upon the parameter setting. Linear beha-
viour is set in the parameters (Ik = Sk) as the starting point.
The ratio of progress Zk of integrating the total and the actual quantity Kk should be calculated. The new
value of the parameter Ik_new at the linearization point k results from the value Ik_old that is active during the
measurement:
Ik_new = Ik_old * Kk / Zk
Also refer to: Adjusting linearization [➙ 251]
4.4.9 Automatic control measurement unit (KME)

Measuring units for mass flows are always subject to fault impacts that change over time. To correct them,
the quantity Mk calculated by continuous measurement over the testing period T0 is compared with the
quantity Mr actually conveyed during this period. Calculating the actual quantity with a remote static scale
makes the procedure very time-consuming. In addition, the flow of bulk solids needed for continuous pro-
duction is interrupted in the process for control.
However, this test can be carried out automatically with the control measurement unit so that continuous
measurement can be automatically corrected.
The requirement for the functioning of this process is that measuring the actual quantity is encumbered with
a substantially smaller fault than continuous measurement. The errors in determining the actual quantity
consist of error E1 (when determining an initial weight value) and error E2 (when determining the second

Operation
weight value). In the worst-case scenario, the total error ET (when determining the actual quantity) may be
calculated as:
|ET| = |E1| + |E2|
The relative error er (when determining the actual test mass Mr) can be estimated at:
er = |ET| / Mr
This error er should not be any more than 1/5 of the admissible error of continuous measurement. This
means that a minimum control quantity can be calculated if error ET is known. The random share of errors
E1 and E2 can be eliminated by carrying out the control several times while only partially correcting the fault.
The error of the continuous scale may contain constant shares, i.e. the tare error and errors dependant
upon the flow rate (the range errors). When correcting the continuous scale, the user has to decide what
type of error it is. It is necessary to distinguish the individual types of errors when operating at different flow
rates. Correct classification is less important if continuous measurement is carried out at approximately
equal flow rates. After all, it is not possible to give a general recommendation for classifying errors due to
the different bulk solids and local conditions.
DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to the technical design in a plant via P25.01 Type of Check System (select-
ing the control strategy).
You can find the parameters for adjusting the control measurement unit in the Check System block of para-
meters. There are further explanations on the process of control in the appendix [➙ 231].
4.4.9.1 Types of control measurement
4.4.9.1.1 Single Unit Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow
of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids is short between the bin and feeder.
Fig. 7: Single Unit KME Model
Depending upon the design, the bin weight also takes in the weight of the mass flow meter and the mass
within the unit.

Operation
4.4.9.1.2 Separated Units Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow
of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids between the bin and feeder is long because additional
transport lines are interposed.
Fig. 8: Separated Units Control Type
Normally, the bin weight no longer takes in the bulk solids on the transport distance.
4.4.9.1.3 Filling System Control Type

The continually measured flow of bulk solids might be redirected through a shunt from the process into the
control bin where it is collected. The time for transporting the bulk solids between the continuous measuring
unit and bin can be long.

Operation
Fig. 9: Filling System KME Type
4.4.9.1.4 External Control Type

The control measurement is carried out through a separate unit if the bulk solids are withdrawn from one bin
by various different ways and collected by means of several continuous measuring units. We urgently rec-
ommend using the DISOCONT Master for this since the process of correction calls for a tight exchange of
data with the continuous scale.
The separate unit measures the bin weight and distributes the errors calculated over the continuous mea-
surements. The correction parameters of the continuous scales are correspondingly adjusted.
Fig. 10: External KME Type

Operation
4.4.9.2 Operating the control measurement (KME)

The control measurement (KME) is a test that is carried out to calculate the error of the continuous scale
based upon the change in the weight of the bulk solids in a bin and automatically correct it wherever de-
sired.
Preconditions:
▪
The P25.01 Type of Check System parameter have to be unequal to NO.
▪
The P25.09 Check Start Tare parameter has to be on OP to be able to start from the operating panel or
EasyServe.
Proceed to start tare correction from the VHM operating panel:
Call up the KME page starting from the main page (HOME).
Testing and additive correction of the zero point are called up with the Check Start Tare button and testing
and multiplicative correction of the measuring unit can be called up by Check Start Span.
After start, control goes through the phases shown in Details and flow chart control measurement (KME).
These phases are shown in the operating panel.
The following process quantities are displayed during the measurement until starting the next measurement:
The quantity shown Unit Description
Contin. Result Z kg The quantity of bulk solids ascertained by the continuous scale
Check Result F/Z - The quotient of the change of bin weight and the quantity ascertained by the
continuous scale
Relative Tare % The correction ascertained in tare with reference to rated load
Correction
Relative Span % The correction ascertained in calibration of span = the deviation in both mea-
Correction surements with reference to the measured value (even after completing the
control)
Check Belt Length m Only with belt-supported systems: the progress in the conveyor belt during
control
Check Meas. Time s Only with non-belt-supported systems: the duration of the measurement
Check Quantity kg Preselected quantity of bulk solids for the control (P25.12). The parameter
can be changed here directly with the privilege of changing parameters .
Check Circuits - Only with belt-supported systems: preselected belt progress for the control
(parameters)
BIN: Fill Weight kg or t Current bin weight
Note:
If P25.03 Auto Correction = YES, the continuous scale is automatically corrected if the results of control are
within the boundaries defined via P25.28 to P25.31.
If automatic correction was not selected or if the results of control are outside of the specified boundaries,
the Apply function can be used to correct the continuous scale. The Cancel function ends control without
changing continuous scale adjustment. The result is maintained to the next control.
If tare is corrected, the correction is carried out through P10.03 Tare Correction and the results of a zone
correction is calculated into P10.01 Range Correction. The correction is documented in the log files.
You can find more detailed information in the Types of control measurement [➙ 42] section and a flow chart
in the appendix.

Operation

Commissioning
5 Commissioning
This chapter describes commissioning the system consisting of the DISOCONT Tersus and the MULTICOR
loss-in-weight feeder.
The following sequence can be used to avoid making mistakes during commissioning.
Step Task
1 Perform or inspect assembly and cabling

2 Control function test
3 Enter parameters given by the data sheet and the circuit diagram
4 Taring the MULTICOR measuring unit
5 Calibrating the external output controller of the feed unit and flow rate controller
6 If available: calibrations for the surge bins
7 If there are greater accuracy requirements: make material checks and readjust
8 If available: adjust the automatic control measurement
Tab. 25 : Suggested sequence for initial start-up
5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components

The subassemblies of a DISOCONT Tersus system come pre-assembled on delivery, e.g. attached to the
scales or installed in a control cabinet.
NOTE: If you have purchased components, please read the DISOCONT Tersus BV-H2406 system
manual where you will find information on the installation dimensions and architecture of
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
5.2 Electrical Connections

The electrical connection for the DISOCONT Tersus is shown - depending on the scope of supply - in the
model circuit diagram or in the system-specific circuit diagrams.
Further information on the electrical properties and interfaces of the subassemblies can be found in the
DISOCONT Tersus system manual BV-H2406.
5.3 Test that the Control is Functioning

Control of the mechanical components, the drives and the interconnection with the system controller can
best be checked with no bulk material in simulation [➙ 32] mode.
5.4 Entering Basic parameters

The scope of a delivery of electronic and mechanical parts will always include a data sheet. It contains all of
the important rated and calibration details. The values must be entered into the corresponding parameters
(Reading and Setting Parameters [➙ 30]).
Parameters often require no further adjustment, as the factory default parameter values permit scales oper-
ation in the most common applications.

Commissioning
Data Parameter No. Parameter Name
The rated load cell capacities of recording torque P05.06 LC Rated Capacity
Characteristic value of load cell sensitivity P05.05 LC Characteristic Value
Nominal feeder flow rate P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate
The nominal speed of the measuring wheel P05.03 Nominal Speed
The characteristic value of speed measurement P05.02 Pulses per Motorrevolution
The radius of the measuring wheel P05.08 Wheel Radius
The lever arm for recording torque P05.07 Lever Arm
Tab. 26 : Basic parameters
It may be necessary to key in other parameters for recording bin weight.
5.5 MULTICOR calibration

It is calibrated when installed without bulk solids. All air connections have to be made, the required air pres-
sure has to be available and the required air currents have to be adjusted. You can find the data in the ma-
nual for the specific mechanical equipment.
The measuring wheel should be started [➙ 30]. Check the equipment for unacceptable foreign particles in
the area of the measuring wheel if loud running noises are audible.
During calibration, it is necessary for the air flow characteristics to correspond those in later operation. Es-
pecially make sure here that air blocks are discontinued before and after the measuring unit as in later op-
eration. An air current changed in operation has an impact on the zero point of the measurement.
The tare program [➙ 37] is called up for calibration. The measured value of the flow rate fluctuates statisti-
cally around zero after accepting the results at a value of less than 1 % of the value set in P03.03. If there
are greater fluctuations, the equipment should be checked for friction in the area of the measuring wheel.
It is generally not necessary to calibrate the proportionality constant between the flow rate and measured
value because the equipment is calibrated by keying in the appropriate parameters from the datasheet.
5.6 Adjusting the flow rate regulation

The volumetric discharge output of the feed unit (conveying to the flow rate measuring unit) should be ad-
justed to the application. Within certain limits the adjustment can also be made using the parameter settings
of the DISOCONT Tersus. However, the rough adjustment is initially made by means of the mechanical
design and by the settings on the external output controller.

Commissioning
Fig. 11: Regulating the feeder
The adjustment depends on the type of conveyor element used and the matching output controller. We will
explain the basic procedure during commissioning using the example of a continually rotating feeder. The
procedure is identical for a feed gate continually controlled per the position setpoint with an external position
controller (mostly pneumatic). You can find the details in the relevant manuals of the external controller.
No. Operating sequence
1 Set the flow rate regulation to volumetric operation (not synchronous volumetric) [➙ 28]
2 Select a value between 10 mA and 15 mA as a setpoint bypass P11.08 Bypass. We recommend leaving
the parameter value on factory settings.
3 Fill the bin with a sufficient quantity of bulk material. Bulk material is discharged during this calibration.
Ensure that the discharged material cannot cause malfunctions or damage in downstream processes.
4 Enter flow rate setpoint = zero [➙ 24]
Switch on feeding
5 Select the controller magnitude zero point in P11.04 and P11.06 so that the feeder just conveys no more
bulk solids.
6 Key in the flow rate setpoint between 20 % and 100 % of the nominal flow rate [➙ 24]
7 Adjust the external controller so that the measured flow rate just corresponds to the setpoint. Instructions
can be found in the manual of the external controller. If the appropriate adjustment cannot be made, there
might be reason to believe that the mechanical design of the feeder is not good.
If it is not possible to adjust the external parts, they can be adjusted with the bypass constant (P11.08).
Tab. 27 : Carrying out calibration
The control parameters in the factory settings already supply sufficiently good and stable control characte-
ristics at short running times from the feeder to the measuring point. Wherever necessary, the parameters
can be manually improved in the Rate controller block.

Commissioning
5.7 Check with bulk solids

Each test or calibration with calibration weights can only approximate the actual operating conditions. A
highly accurate continuous measurement can only be achieved by making several measurements with bulk
material and a subsequent correction. It is corrected with Range Correction P10.01. The following figure
shows an example of the arrangement for checking belt-based continuous throughput metering.
Fig. 12: Arrangement for verification with bulk material
The following items must be observed:

1. The route from the continuous measuring point to the collecting point for the material has to be clean.
2. If there are any diverters they may not convey any material.
3. If there are any feed screws or air slides between the continuous measuring point and the collecting
point, material should be conveyed for approximately ½ hour before making a check. This will allow the
usual material build-ups to form on the conveying elements.
4. Dedusting should be set to a minimum.
5. The bins or vehicles in which the material is transported onto a (legal-for-trade) commercial scale must
be cleaned and re-weighed (tared) before each filling. The commercial scales must be sufficiently accu-
rate to measure the MW quantity.
The new value P10.01new is calculated as follows from the prior value P10.01old from the MA counter pro-
gression of continuous measurement and the MW mass ascertained on the control scale:
P10.01new = P10.01old * MW / MA
For example:
Old value of P10.01 = 1
A material quantity of MW = 4.9 t is conveyed over a period of 15 minutes. The MA counter progression
read off the device is 5.0 t.
P10.01new = 1 * 4.9/5.0 = 0.98
The calculated value should be entered into P10.01.
5.8 Calibrating bin weighing

The prerequisite for precision measurement of the quantity of bulk solids in a bin is installing the bin free of
shunt forces. The weight of the bin may only be supported on the load cells. The connections should be led
to the bin horizontally and with supple compensators.
Compression forces can cause substantial measuring errors when determining the mass of bulk solids if the
compressive forces attack vertically on the bin. In particular, this danger exists on the input and output of the
bin. The compression forces should be compensated for if it is not possible to avoid variable pressures at
these points. It can be compensated for mechanically or electronically when recording pressure.

Commissioning
The parameters for the bin's load cells should be keyed into P22.02, P22.03 and P22.04. The data apply
correspondingly if a second weighed bin is supposed to be adjusted.
The tare program [➙ 38] should be called up if the bin is empty. The fill level's display should vary by zero
after taking on the findings. As a check, it is advisable to get the bin vibrating for a brief period of time and
then check the measured weight value. The deviation from zero is a measure of the likely measuring error.
The bin weigher is now calibrated when using calibrated load cells.
▪
NOTES: If checking zero point stability has given rise to major errors, there are generally also
errors between the actual and displayed weight for bulk solids.
▪
The proportionality between the actual and displayed weight can be checked with the
calibration program CB: Weight Check and corrected [➙ 39].
▪
The rated value for the bin fill level should be set into P22.09 for theoretical considera-
tions, the data sheet or an optic check with a full bin.
▪
If the bin fill level is regulated by turning a prefeeder on and off, the P22.12 and P22.13
parameters should be adjusted for filling control.
▪
Regulation should be streamlined [➙ 39] after keying in the parameters if the fill level
is created with a prefeeder continually controlled in its flow performance.

Maintenance and Recalibration
6 Maintenance and Recalibration

The electronic equipment of the DISOCONT Tersus system is maintenance free. It does not contain any
wear parts under the specified ambient conditions (refer to the BV-H2406 system manual). The MTBF
(Mean Time Between Failures) is longer than 10 years. This section describes possible measures that can
be taken to guarantee accuracy of the measuring system, including for the mechanical components.
Occasion Action Remarks
Periodically, e.g. every 3 months Turn off bulk solids conveying and Most errors in the measuring unit can
tare [➙ 37] the measuring unit. be identified in changes in tare.
A substantial change in tare indicates
changed air currents or friction in the
measuring unit. It might make sense
to check the equipment for unaccept-
able foreign particles and material
build-up of bulk solids in the instru-
ment room.
If available: check the bin weight ac- The bin should be set vibrating for a
quisition. brief period of time. The weight values
shown before and after these vibra-
tions provide a measure for shunt
forces. This can also be checked with
an empty bin. The results of taring
[➙ 50] provide a measure of the bulk
solids remaining in the bin when emp-
tying.
Change in bulk material Adjust the external output controller You may need to adjust the rated
[➙ 48] output and possibly the fill limits for a
bin.
Periodically as per the operating in- Do the maintenance work listed in the The interval may depend on the bulk
structions of the mechanical measur- manual. solids.
ing equipment and other mechanical
parts of the unit
Tab. 28 : Suggested actions

Parameters
7 Parameters
The DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to each application via parameters. No special programing knowledge is
therefore necessary.
Fig. 13: Parameter sets
Parameter set Purpose Activation Preparation and Alteration

Active parameter set Complete parameter set Always active Using EasyServe, the soft-
Regulation of measuring ware the VHM operating
and control functions console or a web server
default settings Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Cannot be changed
Non-alterable basic set- meter set using EasyServe,
ting the software the VHM oper-
ating console [➙ 31] or a
web server
Backup set Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Only using EasyServe in
Pre-setting for a group of meter set using EasyServe, expert mode
applications or a setting the software the VHM oper-
stored during commis- ating console [➙ 31] or a
sioning web server
Tab. 29 : Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus
Note: parameters not required for an application can be faded out or declared 'read only' using EasyServe
in expert mode. EasyServe compiles a list of visible parameters that form an integral part of the system do-
cumentation. They, together with this manual, make up the relevant documentation of the control system for
an application. The parameter list in the operating manual contains all of the parameters, regardless of their
actual use in an application.
In addition to the parameter set stored in the scales, we recommend that after commissioning you keep a
copy of the parameter set in a mass storage medium using EasyServe.
The parameters are arranged into blocks to for clarity. A parameter is uniquely identified by its block and
number within that block in the respective scales software version:
P01.03: block of parameters 1 → Parameter 3

Parameters
Note: Each parameter also has a unique number (ID) with which it can be addressed over the serial inter-
face. This number can be seen as a tooltip in EasyServe when passing over the parameter and can be out-
put in the parameter printout.
Gaps can appear between block numbers and parameters within the blocks.
In rare cases, the number of a parameter may change.
Note: The procedure for resetting with the VHM operating panel all parameters to their factory defaults is
described here: Reset to Factory Settings [➙ 31]. The procedure can also be called up using EasyServe.
7.1 Abbreviations
Source Description
FB Fieldbus
OP Operating panel
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
AI Analog Inputs
AO Analog Outputs
LS Logical signal for using internally available signals
Event Event. The reaction to the occurrence of an event can be configured.
W1 Warning 1 (requires acknowledgement)
W2 Warning 2 (does not require acknowledgement)
ALARM Alarm (requires acknowledgement)
IGNORE Ignore: do not show any event message, but switch the corresponding contact outputs
LC Load Cell
I Flow rate
v Belt velocity
VCU VCU 20100 system unit of DISOCONT Tersus. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VHM DISOCONT Tersus operating panel. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VMO The machine operating console for service work. Refer to the BV-H2488 manual for details.
Tab. 30 : Abbreviations frequently used in parameters
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces

The internal software signals and signals sent externally through the interfaces are linked by means of pa-
rameters. The parameters governing the link are assigned to the logic signals and describe the origin or the
target of a signal.
The linking takes place in steps across several sections.

Parameters
Step Task
1. Select the source, such as DI, DO, ..., ...

n/a means not assigned; i.e., the function does not have any direct interaction with its surround-
ings.
2. Selection of the control unit, such as VCUx or VMOx, ...
It only shows the control units preselected in the Hardware Modules block of parameters.
As many 3 VCU and 2 VMO can be assigned to one scale. Address switches are used to diffe-
rentiate between the units. Details on setting the address can be found in the system manual BV-
H2406.
3. Select the channel number on the control unit, e.g. DI 1 ...
4. Select for the active signal the external signal level LOW or HIGH.
Tab. 31 : Step-by-step specification of signal links
The source parameter defines whether a more precise signal path setting is also necessary. The linking
parameters only offer technically meaningful interfaces.
Source Unit Channel Level Purpose
DI VCU1-VCU3 DI1-DI7 High, Low Binary input signals

VMO1-VMO2
FB
DO VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Binary output signals
VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5
AI VCU1-VCU3 AI1-AI2 Analog interface
VMO1-VMO2 AI1-AI3
AO VCU1-VCU3 AO1-AO4 Analog interface
VMO1-VMO2 AO1-AO3
LC VCU1-VCU3 LC1-LC2 Load cell interface
LS VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Internal by-pass of an output for local
VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5 operation
n/a The internal signal is not assigned to any interface. Input signals adopt automatically a
state that does not interfere with the
program flow.
FB Fieldbus, no additional details required Controlled by signals or fieldbus
OP VHM operating panel, no additional details required Controlled by operating panel entries
v Speed, no additional details required Link with an internal signal
Tab. 32 : Signal sources and their descriptions
Source Type of internal signal

Unit Interface assembly for external signal exchange
Channel Designation of the channel in the unit
Level Identifier of the value of the external signal if the internal logical signal accepts the True value. You
can switch here between active high and active low signal levels, i.e. the value of the external sig-
nal can be inverted.
Tab. 33 : Meaning of the columns

Parameters
Setting Binary input NAMUR input Binary output
Low Voltage = 0 V across the Current at the input > 3 mA High resistance, relay contact open
input terminals (sensor not covered)
High Voltage > 18 VDC across Current at the input < 1 mA Low resistance, relay contact closed
the input terminals (sensor covered)
Tab. 34 : The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal
Name Unit Source Channel Level

DI: External Event 1 DI VCU1 DI1 Low
Tab. 35 : Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel
The DI: External Event 1 signal is connected at input DI1 of VCU1. If the input is open (low), this is inter-
preted as logically True (or 1).
7.3 Configuring Event

Event Messages
The system monitors a range of both of its own operation and the peripherals. The reaction to a recognized
deviation, that is to say an event, is set by parameter. The parameters are used to assign to each event a
class that will determine this reaction.
Event class Description Impact on Acknowledgement Color on

Feeding required the VHM
Alarm ALARM Stopping feed operation, Yes Red

The scale will be turned off,
Cannot be switched on
Warning 1 W1 Feeder will continue to run Yes Orange
Warning 2 W2 Feeder will continue to run No Yellow
Only display as long as
the event is active
Ignore IG Feeder will continue to run - -
Tab. 36 : Event classes
NOTE: An external binary output channel is set that may have been assigned to the event regard-
less of the event class.
A recently pending alarm- or warning 1-class event will be shown on the operating panel blinking and in
color. The blinking stops when acknowledged. Acknowledged event messages are cleared from the display
for currently pending events when the event is no longer pending. Each event is stored with a time-stamp in
the internal memory [➙ 29] for later analysis.

Parameters
7.4 Parameter List
7.4.1 Parameter Overview

VMC20170-002 2202
01 - Hardware Modules
Number: Name Default Customer Sys ID
P01.01 [➙ 81] Analog Channel A10 NO 5746
P01.02 [➙ 81] Analog Channel A11 NO 5747
P01.03 [➙ 81] VCU20100-Unit 2 NO 4211
P01.04 [➙ 81] VCU2: Analog Channel A10 NO 5771
P01.06 [➙ 81] Event: Communication A 4216

VCU20100-Unit 2
P01.07 [➙ 81] VCU20100-Unit 3 NO 4212

VCU20100-Unit 3
P01.11 [➙ 81] VHM RS485 Address 1 4221
P01.12 [➙ 81] VMO20100-Unit 1 NO 4222

VMO20100-Unit 1
P01.14 [➙ 81] VMO20100-Unit 2 NO 5834

VMO20100-Unit 2
02 - Dialog Behaviour
P02.01 [➙ 84] Language * DEUTSCH 4224
P02.02 [➙ 84] Units * Metric 4225
P02.03 [➙ 84] Scale Name * DISOCONT Tersus VMC 6238
P02.04 [➙ 84] Access Rights Limitation HMI * NO 4801
P02.05 [➙ 84] Remote IP Address HMI 1 * 192.168.240.21 4798
P02.06 [➙ 84] Event: Communication HMI 1 * IG 4218

Parameters
P02.11 [➙ 84] Event: Communication VHM seri- IG 4804

al *
P02.12 [➙ 84] Password * 10000 4292
P02.13 [➙ 84] 2. Password * 14389 4321
P02.14 [➙ 84] Reset Counter 1 * active 4286
P02.15 [➙ 84] Reset Counter 2 * active 4287
P02.16 [➙ 84] Batch control * active 4283
P02.17 [➙ 84] Switch Grav./Vol. command * active 4595
P02.18 [➙ 84] Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode * active 4282
P02.19 [➙ 84] Filling control bin weigher * active 4598
P02.20 [➙ 84] Prefeeder start/stop * active 4813
P02.21 [➙ 84] Loadwheel start/stop * active 4814
P02.22 [➙ 84] Data Log ON/OFF * Password 4309
P02.23 [➙ 84] Exit Scale * active 4600
03 - Feeder Definition
P03.01 [➙ 89] Control YES 4590
P03.02 [➙ 89] Wheel Continous Operation YES 4673
P03.03 [➙ 89] Nominal Flow Rate 20000 kg/h 4226
P03.04 [➙ 89] Flow Rate Units ---.-- t/h 4229
P03.05 [➙ 89] Counter 1 Unit ----.-- t 4230
P03.06 [➙ 89] Counter 2 Unit -----.- t 4232
P03.07 [➙ 89] Counter 3 Unit ------- t 4233
P03.08 [➙ 89] Pulse Length Total 0s 4231
P03.09 [➙ 89] DO: Pulse Counter n/a 4239
P03.10 [➙ 89] Totalizer Increment 0 kg 4254
04 - Control Sources
P04.01 [➙ 92] Feeder Start * FB 4241
P04.02 [➙ 92] Feedrate Setpoint * FB 4242
P04.03 [➙ 92] Setpoint Range * 20 mA 4243

Parameters
P04.04 [➙ 92] Setpoint Offset * 4 mA 4244
P04.05 [➙ 92] Source Run Enable * n/a 4245
P04.06 [➙ 92] Event: Run Disabled * W2 4246
P04.07 [➙ 92] Source Relative Setpoint * n/a 6233
P04.08 [➙ 92] Relativer Setpoint Range * 20 mA 6240
P04.09 [➙ 92] Relative Setpoint Offset * 4 mA 6241
P04.10 [➙ 92] Difference Flow Rate * n/a 4248
P04.11 [➙ 92] Difference Flow Rate Range * 20 mA 4249
P04.12 [➙ 92] Difference Flow Rate Offset * 4 mA 4250
P04.13 [➙ 92] Difference Function * NO 4251
05 - Rated Data
P05.01 [➙ 95] Speed Measurement DI 4952
P05.02 [➙ 95] Pulses per Motorrevolution 30 Imp 4642
P05.03 [➙ 95] Nominal Speed 1000 1/min 4643
P05.04 [➙ 95] LC: Load Measurement LC 4266
P05.05 [➙ 95] LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4257
P05.06 [➙ 95] LC Rated Capacity 100 kg 4258
P05.07 [➙ 95] Lever Arm 60 mm 4264
P05.08 [➙ 95] Wheel Radius 200 mm 4674
P05.09 [➙ 95] Loading cell BT ID1 00:00:00:00:00:00 4823
P05.10 [➙ 95] Loading cell BT ID2 00:00:00:00:00:00 4824
P05.11 [➙ 95] DO Bluetooth Reset n/a 4475
P05.12 [➙ 95] Bluetooth channel broken W2 4517
06 - Feeder control
P06.01 [➙ 97] Volumetric Start-Up 0s 4272

Parameters
P06.02 [➙ 97] Measuring Delay 5s 4275
P06.03 [➙ 97] T_Volumetric 50 s 4617
P06.04 [➙ 97] Event: T_Volum. W1 4619
07 - Feeder Monitoring
P07.01 [➙ 98] Event: Stand-By W2 4289
P07.02 [➙ 98] Stand-By Limit Value 0 % Io 4290
P07.03 [➙ 98] Event: Tachometer Input A 4291
P07.04 [➙ 98] Event: Error LC Input A 4293
P07.05 [➙ 98] Event: LC Input > MAX A 4295
P07.06 [➙ 98] Event: Setpoint Limited W1 4296
P07.07 [➙ 98] Event: Power Failure A 4297
P07.08 [➙ 98] Time Deviation 20 s 4298
P07.09 [➙ 98] Threshold Deviation 5% 4299
P07.10 [➙ 98] Factor Deviation 1 4320
P07.11 [➙ 98] Deviation abs. max. 100 % 6255
P07.12 [➙ 98] Event: Deviation A 4300
P07.13 [➙ 98] Event: Controller Limited W2 4301
P07.14 [➙ 98] Event: Memory A 4302
P07.15 [➙ 98] Event: Analog Input < Offset A 5418
08 - Filters
P08.01 [➙ 103] LC Filter 0.25 s 4334
P08.02 [➙ 103] Filter: Actual Flow Rate 3s 4328
P08.03 [➙ 103] Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog 3s 4329
P08.04 [➙ 103] Filter: Load 3s 4335
P08.05 [➙ 103] Filter: Deviation 3s 4333
09 - Limit Values
P09.01 [➙ 104] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN 5 % Io 4337
P09.02 [➙ 104] Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN W1 4338
P09.03 [➙ 104] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX 120 % Io 4339

Parameters
P09.04 [➙ 104] Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX W1 4340
P09.05 [➙ 104] Value for Load-Max 100 % LC 4349
P09.06 [➙ 104] Event: Maximum Load A 4350
P09.07 [➙ 104] Speed-Min Value 5%n 4630
P09.08 [➙ 104] Event: Speed-Min W1 4632
10 - Calibration Data
P10.01 [➙ 105] Range Correction 1 4352
P10.02 [➙ 105] Basic Tare 0 kg/h 4355
P10.03 [➙ 105] Tare Correction 0 kg/h 4356
P10.04 [➙ 105] Zeroing Limit 4 % Io 4677
P10.05 [➙ 105] Calibration Time 30 s 4358
P10.06 [➙ 105] Tare Correction Check 0 kg/h 4935
11 - Rate controller
P11.01 [➙ 106] Controller Type Continuous 4701
P11.02 [➙ 106] P-Component KP 0.02 mA/% 4369
P11.03 [➙ 106] I-Component TN 3s 4370
P11.04 [➙ 106] Lower Limit 0 mA 4371
P11.05 [➙ 106] Upper Limit 20 mA 4372
P11.06 [➙ 106] Controller Magnitude Offset 0 mA 4373
P11.07 [➙ 106] Position at STOP 0 4374
P11.08 [➙ 106] Bypass 10 mA 4375
P11.09 [➙ 106] Store NO 4376
P11.10 [➙ 106] Setpoint Filter 1st Ord 2s 4378
P11.11 [➙ 106] Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord 0s 4379
P11.12 [➙ 106] S: P-Component 0.033 s/% 4687
P11.13 [➙ 106] S: I-Component 3s 4688
P11.14 [➙ 106] S: Threshold Response 0.1 % 4689

Parameters
P11.15 [➙ 106] Compensation Element 0 1/s 4690
P11.16 [➙ 106] KP Adaptation 1 4644
P11.17 [➙ 106] Setpoint Threshold 0 % Io 4805
12 - Analog Outputs
P12.01 [➙ 111] AO: Setpoint n/a 4385
P12.02 [➙ 111] Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4386
P12.03 [➙ 111] Setpoint Range 20 mA 4387
P12.04 [➙ 111] AO: Actual Flow Rate n/a 4388
P12.05 [➙ 111] Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 4389
P12.06 [➙ 111] Flow Rate Range 20 mA 4390
P12.07 [➙ 111] AO: Load n/a 4401
P12.08 [➙ 111] Load Offset 4 mA 4402
P12.09 [➙ 111] Load Range 20 mA 4403
P12.10 [➙ 111] AO: Speed n/a 4651
P12.11 [➙ 111] Speed Offset 4 mA 4649
P12.12 [➙ 111] Speed Range 20 mA 4650
P12.13 [➙ 111] AO: Deviation n/a 4397
P12.14 [➙ 111] Deviation Offset 4 mA 4398
P12.15 [➙ 111] Deviation Range 20 mA 4399
P12.16 [➙ 111] AO: Motor Speed Control AO 4400
13 - Digital Inputs
P13.01 [➙ 113] Event: External Event 1 * A 4417
P13.02 [➙ 113] DI: External Event 1 * DI 4418
P13.03 [➙ 113] Event: External Event 2 * A 4430
P13.04 [➙ 113] DI: External Event 2 * DI 4431
P13.05 [➙ 113] Event: External Event 3 * IG 4730
P13.06 [➙ 113] DI: External Event 3 * n/a 4731
P13.07 [➙ 113] Event: External Event 4 * IG 4732
P13.08 [➙ 113] DI: External Event 4 * n/a 4733
P13.09 [➙ 113] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 * A 4409

Parameters
P13.10 [➙ 113] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 * A 4410
P13.11 [➙ 113] Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 * IG 4411
P13.15 [➙ 113] DI: Acknowledge Events * n/a 4419
P13.16 [➙ 113] DI: Local Mode * n/a 4420
P13.17 [➙ 113] DI: Volumetric Mode * n/a 4421
P13.18 [➙ 113] DI: Volumetric synchron * n/a 4941
P13.19 [➙ 113] DI: Reset Totalizer 1 * n/a 5414
P13.20 [➙ 113] DI: Reset Totalizer 2 * n/a 5415
14 - Digital Outputs
P14.01 [➙ 118] DO: Wheel Start DO 4447
P14.02 [➙ 118] DO: Feeder Started DO 4434
P14.03 [➙ 118] DO: Start Prefeeder DO 4435
P14.04 [➙ 118] DO: ALARM DO 4436
P14.05 [➙ 118] DO: Deviation n/a 4437
P14.06 [➙ 118] DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN n/a 4438
P14.07 [➙ 118] DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX n/a 4439
P14.08 [➙ 118] DO: Load MAX n/a 4473
P14.09 [➙ 118] DO: n-MIN n/a 4631
P14.10 [➙ 118] DO: Volumetric Mode n/a 4444
P14.11 [➙ 118] DO: Local Mode n/a 4445
P14.12 [➙ 118] DO: WARNING n/a 4759
P14.13 [➙ 118] DO: Keyboard Mode n/a 4462
P14.14 [➙ 118] DO Volum Mode n/a 4477
15 - Batch Mode
P15.01 [➙ 120] Batch Mode NO 4448
P15.02 [➙ 120] Batch Setpoint Source FB 4449
P15.03 [➙ 120] Adaptation Time 3s 4450

Parameters
P15.04 [➙ 120] Correction Amount 0 kg 4451
P15.05 [➙ 120] Adaptation Factor 0.5 4452
P15.06 [➙ 120] Batch Automatic Record NO 4453
P15.07 [➙ 120] DI: Batch Terminate n/a 4454
P15.08 [➙ 120] DO: Batch Running n/a 4455
P15.09 [➙ 120] DO: Dribble Feed n/a 4456
P15.10 [➙ 120] DO: Full Feed n/a 4457
P15.11 [➙ 120] Analog Setpoint Relat. 1000 kg 4936
P15.12 [➙ 120] Batch Setpoint Range 20 mA 4937
P15.13 [➙ 120] Batch Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4938
P15.14 [➙ 120] Batch Tolerance 100000 kg 4458
P15.15 [➙ 120] Event: Out of Tolerance W2 4459
P15.16 [➙ 120] Batch Setpoint Limit 1000000 kg 4781
P15.17 [➙ 120] Event: Batch setpoint Limit W1 4782
16 - Maintenance interval
P16.01 [➙ 123] Maintenance Electric 3000 h 4465
P16.02 [➙ 123] Event: Maint. Electric IG 4466
P16.03 [➙ 123] Maintenance Feeder Run 3000 h 4467
P16.04 [➙ 123] Event: Maint.Feeder Run IG 4468
17 - Communication EasyServe
P17.01 [➙ 124] Own Address 1 4520
P17.02 [➙ 124] Baud Rate 38400 4521
P17.03 [➙ 124] Format Data 8-N-1 6189
18 - Communication Fieldbus
P18.01 [➙ 125] Protocol Type NO 4528
P18.02 [➙ 125] Timeout Host 10 s 4529
P18.03 [➙ 125] Event: Cyclic Communication A 4530
P18.04 [➙ 125] Event: Acyclic Communication W2 5680
P18.05 [➙ 125] Check in Keyboard Mode YES 6234

Parameters
P18.06 [➙ 125] Compatibility DISOCONT Master NO 6287
P18.07 [➙ 125] Word Sequence I:std/L:std 6246
P18.08 [➙ 125] Byte Sequence High - Low 6245
P18.09 [➙ 125] Configuration FIXED_8_16 4661
P18.10 [➙ 125] Address 1 4531
P18.11 [➙ 125] Resolution 4096 4533
P18.12 [➙ 125] Baud rate 19200 4535
P18.13 [➙ 125] Data Format 8-O-1 4656
P18.14 [➙ 125] Physics RS232 6186
P18.15 [➙ 125] Address 16 4539
P18.16 [➙ 125] FLOAT-Format IEEE 4540
P18.17 [➙ 125] Address 63 4541
P18.18 [➙ 125] Baud rate 125K 4542
P18.19 [➙ 125] Parameter NO 4658
P18.20 [➙ 125] Preset Count 2 4734
P18.21 [➙ 125] READ_ID Count 6 4659
P18.22 [➙ 125] Access Rights Limitation FB NO 4786
P18.23 [➙ 125] Remote IP Address FB 192.168.240.250 4787
19 - Fixed mode configuration

P19.01 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 1 320 6247
P19.02 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 2 352 6248
P19.03 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 3 384 6249
P19.04 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 4 592 6250
P19.05 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 5 594 6251
P19.06 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 6 610 6252
P19.07 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 7 0 6253
P19.08 [➙ 130] ID Preset Value 8 0 6254
P19.09 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 1 752 6256
P19.10 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 2 784 6257
P19.11 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 3 1552 6258
P19.12 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 4 1872 6259

Parameters
P19.13 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 5 1874 6260
P19.14 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 6 1882 6261
P19.15 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 7 1890 6262
P19.16 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 8 1894 6263
P19.17 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 9 816 6264
P19.18 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 10 1876 6265
P19.19 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 11 1886 6266
P19.20 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 12 1960 6267
P19.21 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 13 1896 6268
P19.22 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 14 1898 6269
P19.23 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 15 1902 6270
P19.24 [➙ 130] ID Read Value 16 1904 6271
20 - Ethernet
P20.01 [➙ 134] IP Address 192.168.240.1 6235
P20.02 [➙ 134] Net Mask 255.255.255.0 6236
P20.03 [➙ 134] Gateway 0.0.0.0 6237
21 - PLC Outputs
P21.01 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 1 n/a 4662
P21.02 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 2 n/a 4663
P21.03 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 3 n/a 4664
P21.04 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 4 n/a 4665
P21.05 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 5 n/a 4666
P21.06 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 6 n/a 4667
P21.07 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 7 n/a 4668
P21.08 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 8 n/a 4669
P21.09 [➙ 134] AO: PLC 1 n/a 4670
P21.10 [➙ 134] AO: PLC 2 n/a 4671
22 - Bin Weigher
P22.01 [➙ 136] Bin Weigher Active NO 4704

Parameters
P22.02 [➙ 136] LC: Load Measurement n/a 4705
P22.05 [➙ 136] LC Filter 0.25 s 4708
P22.06 [➙ 136] Bipolar Measurement NO 4712
P22.07 [➙ 136] Event: Error LC Input (Bin) W1 4709
P22.08 [➙ 136] Event: LC Input > MAX W1 4710
P22.09 [➙ 136] Nominal Bin Load 100 % LC 4711
P22.10 [➙ 136] Display Format ---.--- t 4672
P22.11 [➙ 136] Display Filter 3s 4713
P22.12 [➙ 136] Control Level MIN 60 % 4714
P22.13 [➙ 136] Control Level MAX 70 % 4715
P22.14 [➙ 136] DO: Bin Filling n/a 4716
P22.15 [➙ 136] Bin Level MIN 5% 4717
P22.16 [➙ 136] Event: Bin Level MIN W1 4718
P22.17 [➙ 136] DO: Bin Level MIN n/a 4719
P22.18 [➙ 136] Bin Level MAX 120 % 4720
P22.19 [➙ 136] Event: Bin Level MAX W1 4721
P22.20 [➙ 136] DO: Bin Level MAX n/a 4722
P22.21 [➙ 136] AO: Bin Load n/a 4723
P22.22 [➙ 136] AO: Offset 4 mA 4724
P22.23 [➙ 136] AO: Range 20 mA 4725
P22.25 [➙ 136] Tare (Bin) 0 kg 4727
P22.26 [➙ 136] Calibration Weight 10 kg 4728
P22.27 [➙ 136] Controller in OFF-Mode NO 4755
P22.28 [➙ 136] DI: Bin Load Sensor n/a 5401
P22.29 [➙ 136] Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor W1 5402
P22.30 [➙ 136] Bin Level analog Input Offset 4 mA 4825
P22.31 [➙ 136] Bin Level analog Input Range 20 mA 4826
23 - Bin Level Controller


Parameters
P23.01 [➙ 144] Bin Controller ON NO 4735
P23.02 [➙ 144] Filling Type YES 4736
P23.03 [➙ 144] AO: Controller Magnitude Bin n/a 4738

Level
P23.04 [➙ 144] DO: Feeder ON n/a 4758
P23.05 [➙ 144] Setpoint Bin Level 0 kg 4757
P23.06 [➙ 144] Feeder Constant 0 (kg/h)/mA 4741
P23.07 [➙ 144] Dead Time TT 3s 4742
P23.08 [➙ 144] P-Component KP 0 mA/kg 4739
P23.09 [➙ 144] I-Component TN 0s 4740
P23.10 [➙ 144] D Portion TV 0s 4747
P23.11 [➙ 144] D Filter TD 0s 4748
P23.12 [➙ 144] Bypass 10 mA 4743
P23.13 [➙ 144] Bypass D Portion 0s 4749
P23.14 [➙ 144] Controller Magnitude Offset 0 mA 4744
P23.15 [➙ 144] Lower Limit 0 mA 4745
P23.16 [➙ 144] Upper Limit 20 mA 4746
P23.17 [➙ 144] Dead Band Deviation 0 kg 4750
P23.18 [➙ 144] Dead Band Factor 0 4751
P23.19 [➙ 144] Setpoint Filter 0.5 s 4752
P23.20 [➙ 144] Flow Rate Filter 0.5 s 4753
P23.21 [➙ 144] DI: Init. Controller n/a 4754
P23.22 [➙ 144] Bin Setpoint source PARAMETER 5476
P23.23 [➙ 144] Stepper no Stepper 5549
P23.24 [➙ 144] S: P-Component 0.033 s/% 5550
P23.25 [➙ 144] S: I-Component 3s 5551
P23.26 [➙ 144] S: D-Component 0s 5552
P23.27 [➙ 144] S: Threshold Resp. 0.1 % 5553
P23.28 [➙ 144] S: Compensation Element 0 1/s 5554
P23.29 [➙ 144] S: DO Open Flow Gate (B) n/a 5555
P23.30 [➙ 144] S: DO Close Flow Gate (B) n/a 5556
P23.31 [➙ 144] AI: Position Flow Gate (B) n/a 5557
P23.32 [➙ 144] AI: Offset (B) 4 mA 5558

Parameters
P23.33 [➙ 144] AI: Range (B) 20 mA 5559
P23.34 [➙ 144] AO: Position Flow Gate (B) n/a 5560
P23.35 [➙ 144] AO: Offset (B) 4 mA 5561
P23.36 [➙ 144] AO: Range (B) 20 mA 5562
P23.37 [➙ 144] Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) W2 5563
P23.38 [➙ 144] Position MIN Flow Gate (B) n/a 5564
P23.39 [➙ 144] Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) W2 5565
P23.40 [➙ 144] Position MAX Flow Gate(B) n/a 5566
24 - Second Bin Weigher

P24.01 [➙ 152] Second Bin Weigher Active NO 4829
P24.02 [➙ 152] LC: Load Measurement n/a 4830
P24.03 [➙ 152] Bin Level analog Input Offset 4 mA 4854
P24.04 [➙ 152] Bin Level analog Input Range 20 mA 4855
P24.07 [➙ 152] LC Filter 0.25 s 4833
P24.08 [➙ 152] Bipolar Measurement NO 4834
P24.09 [➙ 152] Event: Error LC Input W1 4835
P24.10 [➙ 152] Event: LC Input > MAX W1 4856
P24.11 [➙ 152] Nominal Bin Load 100 % LC 4836
P24.12 [➙ 152] Display Format ---.--- t 4837
P24.13 [➙ 152] Display Filter 3s 4838
P24.14 [➙ 152] Control Level MIN 60 % 4839
P24.15 [➙ 152] Control Level MAX 70 % 4840
P24.16 [➙ 152] DO: Bin Filling n/a 4841
P24.17 [➙ 152] Bin Level MIN 5% 4842
P24.18 [➙ 152] Event: Bin Level MIN W1 4478
P24.19 [➙ 152] DO: Bin Level MIN n/a 4843
P24.20 [➙ 152] Bin Level MAX 120 % 4844
P24.21 [➙ 152] Event: Bin Level MAX W1 4479
P24.22 [➙ 152] DO: Bin Level MAX n/a 4845

Parameters
P24.23 [➙ 152] AO: Bin Load n/a 4847
P24.24 [➙ 152] AO: Offset 4 mA 4849
P24.25 [➙ 152] AO: Range 20 mA 4850
P24.27 [➙ 152] Tare (Bin) 0 kg 4852
P24.28 [➙ 152] Calibration Weight 10 kg 4853
25 - Check System
P25.01 [➙ 158] Type of Check System NO 4861
P25.02 [➙ 158] Check System Influence Bin 4785
P25.03 [➙ 158] Auto Correction NO 4903
P25.04 [➙ 158] Cyclic Auto Start NO 4862
P25.05 [➙ 158] Cycle Time 0.5 h 4863
P25.06 [➙ 158] Release Check System n/a 4864
P25.07 [➙ 158] Event: No Check Release W2 4884
P25.08 [➙ 158] Check Start Span OP 4865
P25.09 [➙ 158] Check Start Tare OP 4866
P25.10 [➙ 158] Accept Correction OP 4867
P25.11 [➙ 158] Finish Check Measurement OP 4868
P25.12 [➙ 158] Check Quantity 0 kg 4871
P25.13 [➙ 158] Storage Quantity 500 kg 4872
P25.14 [➙ 158] Minimum Fill Weight 0 kg 4875
P25.15 [➙ 158] Event: Minimum Fill Weight W1 4876
P25.16 [➙ 158] Maximum Fill Weight 1000 kg 4877
P25.17 [➙ 158] Event: Maximum Fill Weight W1 4878
P25.18 [➙ 158] Damping Time 3s 4879
P25.19 [➙ 158] DO: Control Started n/a 4881
P25.20 [➙ 158] Feeder Stopped n/a 4882
P25.21 [➙ 158] Event: Feeder Not Stopped W1 4883
P25.22 [➙ 158] Event: Prepare Check Measure- W2 4885

ment
P25.23 [➙ 158] DO: Check Measurement Active n/a 4887
P25.24 [➙ 158] Event: Expect Acceptance W2 4888

Parameters
P25.25 [➙ 158] DO:Expect Acceptance n/a 4889
P25.26 [➙ 158] Absolute Range 10 % 4890
P25.27 [➙ 158] Relative Range 3% 4891
P25.28 [➙ 158] Event: Absolute Tare Correction W1 4892

Error
P25.29 [➙ 158] Event: Relative Tare Correction W1 4893
Error
P25.30 [➙ 158] Event: Absolute Span Correction W1 4894
Error
P25.31 [➙ 158] Event: Relative Span Correction W1 4895
Error
P25.32 [➙ 158] Correction Evaluation 1 4896
P25.33 [➙ 158] Correction Speed 0s 4897
P25.34 [➙ 158] AO: Check Measurement Result n/a 4898
P25.35 [➙ 158] DO: Check Gate n/a 4899
P25.36 [➙ 158] Check Gate Feedback n/a 4900
P25.37 [➙ 158] Check Gate Time 0s 4901
P25.38 [➙ 158] Event: Check Gate Error W1 4902
P25.39 [➙ 158] Limit Max. Bin Error 0% 4946
P25.40 [➙ 158] Event: Bin Error W1 4947
P25.41 [➙ 158] DO: Correction Error n/a 4904
26 - Tube Control
P26.01 [➙ 170] DI: CO-Alarm Hopper n/a 5607
P26.02 [➙ 170] Event: CO-Alarm Hopper A 5608
P26.03 [➙ 170] DO: Check Valve n/a 5609
P26.04 [➙ 170] Check Valve Feedback n/a 5610
P26.05 [➙ 170] DO: Hopper Aeration n/a 5611
P26.06 [➙ 170] DO Pressure Compen. n/a 4808
P26.07 [➙ 170] DO Check Gate Opened n/a 4809

Parameters
P26.08 [➙ 170] DO Check Gate Closed n/a 4810
P26.09 [➙ 170] Min. KME Feedrate 5% 4821
P26.10 [➙ 170] Event: Min KME Setpoint W1 4827
27 - Moisture
P27.01 [➙ 172] Moisture Active NO 5386
P27.02 [➙ 172] Moisture Select n/a 5399
P27.03 [➙ 172] AI: Moisture Measurement n/a 5387
P27.04 [➙ 172] Nominal Moisture 20 % 5388
P27.05 [➙ 172] Moisture Offset 4 mA 5389
P27.06 [➙ 172] Moisture Range 20 mA 5390
P27.07 [➙ 172] DO: Moisture active n/a 5400
P27.08 [➙ 172] Moisture MAX 10 % 5391
P27.09 [➙ 172] DO: Moisture MAX n/a 5392
P27.10 [➙ 172] Event: Moisture MAX W1 5393
P27.11 [➙ 172] AO: Flow Rate corrected n/a 5394
P27.12 [➙ 172] AO: Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 5395
P27.13 [➙ 172] AO: Flow Rate Range 20 mA 5396
P27.14 [➙ 172] Pulse Counter corrected NO 5397
28 - Additional device
P28.01 [➙ 176] Auto Zero Active NO 4675
P28.02 [➙ 176] Auto Zero Limit 2 % Io 5478
P28.03 [➙ 176] Event: Tare Correction W1 4678
P28.04 [➙ 176] Zero Drop-Out Active NO 4679
P28.05 [➙ 176] Zero Drop-Out Limit 1 % Io 4680
P28.06 [➙ 176] DO: Agitator ON n/a 4654
P28.07 [➙ 176] START Agitator 0 % Io 4572
P28.08 [➙ 176] DO: Ventilation n/a 5567

Parameters
P28.09 [➙ 176] Ventilation Time 60 s 5568
P28.10 [➙ 176] Ventilation Pulse 1s 5569
P28.11 [➙ 176] Ventilation Pause 5s 5570
29 - Pressure Compensation
P29.01 [➙ 178] Compensation Active NO 5479
P29.02 [➙ 178] Compensation Source n/a 5480
P29.03 [➙ 178] Pressure Characteristic Value 2.85 mV/V 5481
P29.04 [➙ 178] Pressure Rated Cap. 1 Bar 5482
P29.05 [➙ 178] Filter Pressure Value DMS 0.25 s 5483
P29.06 [➙ 178] Event: DMS-Input A 5484
P29.07 [➙ 178] Event: DMS-Input > MAX A 5485
P29.08 [➙ 178] Event: DMS-Input < MIN W1 5486
P29.09 [➙ 178] Zero 0.2 Bar 5487
P29.10 [➙ 178] Norming 4580 kg/Bar 5488
P29.11 [➙ 178] Pressure-MIN 40 % 5489
P29.12 [➙ 178] Event: Pressure-MIN IG 5490
P29.13 [➙ 178] DO: Pressure-MIN n/a 5491
P29.14 [➙ 178] Pressure-MAX 45 % 5492
P29.15 [➙ 178] Event: Pressure-MAX W2 5493
P29.16 [➙ 178] DO: Pressure-MAX n/a 5494
P29.17 [➙ 178] DI: Switch On Compensation n/a 5495
P29.18 [➙ 178] Compensation analog Input Offset 4 mA 5583
P29.19 [➙ 178] Compensation analog Input Ran- 20 mA 5584

ge
30 - Dead Time
P30.01 [➙ 182] Dead Time Active NO 5403
P30.02 [➙ 182] Dead Time 0s 5404
P30.03 [➙ 182] Setpoint Select n/a 5405
P30.04 [➙ 182] Setpoint Clock ON n/a 5406
P30.05 [➙ 182] ON/OFF Select n/a 5407
P30.06 [➙ 182] ON/OFF Clock ON n/a 5408

Parameters
P30.07 [➙ 182] Time Elements Preassign n/a 5409
P30.08 [➙ 182] Initialise Time Elements n/a 5410
P30.09 [➙ 182] DO: Dead Time Active n/a 5411
P30.10 [➙ 182] DO: Setpoint Active n/a 5412
P30.11 [➙ 182] DO: ON/OFF Active n/a 5413
31 - Process Temperature
P31.01 [➙ 184] Temperature Active NO 5512
P31.02 [➙ 184] Temperature Measurement n/a 5513
P31.03 [➙ 184] Temperature Norming MIN 0 °C 5514
P31.04 [➙ 184] Temperature Norming MAX 100 °C 5515
P31.05 [➙ 184] Temperature Norming Offset 4 mA 5516
P31.06 [➙ 184] Temperature Norming Range 20 mA 5517
P31.07 [➙ 184] Temperature MAX 80 °C 5518
P31.08 [➙ 184] Event: Temperature-MAX A 5519
P31.09 [➙ 184] Temperature Cooling 70 °C 5546
P31.10 [➙ 184] DO: Cooling n/a 5547
P31.11 [➙ 184] Temperature Hysteresis 3 °C 5548
P31.12 [➙ 184] Pressure Cooling OK n/a 5620
P31.13 [➙ 184] Event: Press. Cooling A 5621
32 - Safety Functions
P32.01 [➙ 187] Safety activation: Option code n/a 7091
P32.02 [➙ 187] DI: Purge Air n/a 4925
P32.03 [➙ 187] DO: Purge Air n/a 4926
P32.04 [➙ 187] Event: No Purge Air A 4927
P32.05 [➙ 187] DI: Conveying Air n/a 4928
P32.06 [➙ 187] Event: No Conveying Air A 4929
P32.07 [➙ 187] Source Emergency Setpoint n/a 4930
P32.08 [➙ 187] Emergency Setpoint 6000 kg/h 4931
P32.09 [➙ 187] Setpoint Step + 300 % Io 4932
P32.10 [➙ 187] Setpoint Step - 300 % Io 4933

Parameters
P32.11 [➙ 187] Setpoint Factor 1.5 4934
P32.12 [➙ 187] If OFF: Reset Setpoint NO 4939
P32.13 [➙ 187] Feeder Check FC NO 4956
P32.14 [➙ 187] FC: Tolerance at 100% 40 % 4959
P32.15 [➙ 187] FC: Tolerance at 50% 20 % 4960
P32.16 [➙ 187] FC: Tolerance at 0% 20 % 4961
P32.17 [➙ 187] Event: FC-MIN Limit W1 4964
P32.18 [➙ 187] Event: FC-MAX Limit A 4965
P32.19 [➙ 187] DO: FC-MAX Limit n/a 4966
P32.20 [➙ 187] DO: FC-MIN Limit n/a 5398
P32.21 [➙ 187] Start Delay NO 5622
P32.23 [➙ 187] Pressure Blower OK n/a 5624
P32.24 [➙ 187] Event: Pressure Blower A 5625
P32.26 [➙ 187] DO Blower n/a 5623
33 - Interlocking
P33.01 [➙ 193] DI: Event Mechanics 1 n/a 4760
P33.06 [➙ 193] DI: Event Electricity 1 n/a 4765
P33.09 [➙ 193] DO: Event Mechanics n/a 4768
P33.10 [➙ 193] Event: Mechanics W1 4769
P33.11 [➙ 193] DO: Event Electricity n/a 4770
P33.12 [➙ 193] Event: Electricity W1 4771
P33.13 [➙ 193] DO: Event Mechatronics 1 n/a 4772
P33.14 [➙ 193] DO: Event Mechatronics 2 n/a 4773
P33.15 [➙ 193] Event: Mechatronics W1 4774
P33.16 [➙ 193] DO: Ready n/a 4775

Parameters
P33.17 [➙ 193] Event: Not Ready W1 4776
P33.18 [➙ 193] DO: Ready for Start n/a 4777
P33.19 [➙ 193] Event: Not Ready for Start W1 4778
34 - FCB analog outputs

P34.01 [➙ 196] FCB_AO 01 n/a 20481
P34.02 [➙ 196] Offset FCB_AO 1 4 mA 6272
P34.03 [➙ 196] Range FCB_AO 1 20 mA 6273
P34.04 [➙ 196] Reference FCB_AO 1 1000 6274
P34.05 [➙ 196] FCB_AO 02 n/a 20482
P34.06 [➙ 196] Offset FCB_AO 2 4 mA 6275
P34.07 [➙ 196] Range FCB_AO 2 20 mA 6276
P34.09 [➙ 196] FCB_AO 03 n/a 20483
P34.10 [➙ 196] Offset FCB_AO 3 4 mA 6278
P34.11 [➙ 196] Range FCB_AO 3 20 mA 6279
P34.13 [➙ 196] FCB_AO 04 n/a 20484
P34.14 [➙ 196] Offset FCB_AO 4 4 mA 6281
P34.15 [➙ 196] Range FCB_AO 4 20 mA 6282
P34.17 [➙ 196] FCB_AO 05 n/a 20485
P34.18 [➙ 196] Offset FCB_AO 5 4 mA 6284
P34.19 [➙ 196] Range FCB_AO 5 20 mA 6285
35 - FCB digital outputs

P35.01 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 01 n/a 20529
P35.02 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 02 n/a 20530
P35.03 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 03 n/a 20531
P35.04 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 04 n/a 20532
P35.05 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 05 n/a 20533

Parameters
P35.06 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 06 n/a 20534
P35.07 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 07 n/a 20535
P35.08 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 08 n/a 20536
P35.09 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 09 n/a 20537
P35.10 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 10 n/a 20538
P35.11 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 11 n/a 20539
P35.12 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 12 n/a 20540
P35.13 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 13 n/a 20541
P35.14 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 14 n/a 20542
P35.15 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 15 n/a 20543
P35.16 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 16 n/a 20544
P35.17 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 17 n/a 20545
P35.18 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 18 n/a 20546
P35.19 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 19 n/a 20547
P35.20 [➙ 199] FCB_DO 20 n/a 20548
36 - Data Logging
P36.01 [➙ 202] Hourly Total Time 0 min 5743
P36.02 [➙ 202] Daily Total Time 0 min 5744
P36.03 [➙ 202] Logger cycle time 1 min 6288
P36.04 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 1 752 6289
P36.05 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 2 755 6290
P36.06 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 3 1894 6291
P36.07 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 4 1874 6292
P36.08 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 5 1876 6293
P36.09 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 6 1888 6294
P36.10 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 7 1894 6295

Parameters
P36.11 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 8 1898 6296
P36.12 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 9 1904 6297
P36.13 [➙ 202] Data Log Value 10 0 6298
37 - Configuration HMI Values

P37.01 [➙ 204] HMI Value 01 1872 6299
P37.02 [➙ 204] HMI Value 02 1894 6300
P37.03 [➙ 204] HMI Value 03 1900 6301
P37.04 [➙ 204] HMI Value 04 1946 6302
P37.05 [➙ 204] HMI Value 05 2044 6303
P37.06 [➙ 204] HMI Value 06 1886 6304
P37.07 [➙ 204] HMI Value 07 1960 6305
P37.08 [➙ 204] HMI Value 08 1904 6306
P37.09 [➙ 204] HMI Value 09 1874 6307
P37.10 [➙ 204] HMI Value 10 2348 6308
38 - Linearization
P38.01 [➙ 206] Linearization ON NO 4577
P38.02 [➙ 206] Linearization S1 25 % Io 4681
P38.03 [➙ 206] Linearization I1 25 % Io 4579
P38.10 [➙ 206] Event: Linearization Error W2 4586
39 - Flow Gate
P39.01 [➙ 207] S: DO Open Flow Gate n/a 4702
P39.02 [➙ 207] S: DO Close Flow Gate n/a 4703
P39.03 [➙ 207] AI: Position Flow Gate n/a 4691

Parameters
P39.04 [➙ 207] AI: Offset 4 mA 4692
P39.05 [➙ 207] AI: Range 20 mA 4693
P39.06 [➙ 207] AO: Position Flow Gate n/a 4694
P39.07 [➙ 207] AO: Offset 4 mA 4695
P39.08 [➙ 207] AO: Range 20 mA 4696
P39.09 [➙ 207] Event: MIN Flow Gate W2 4697
P39.10 [➙ 207] Position MIN Flow Gate n/a 4698
P39.11 [➙ 207] Event: MAX Flow Gate W2 4699
P39.12 [➙ 207] Position MAX Flow Gate n/a 4700
7.4.2 Parameter Details
7.4.2.1
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules
A DISOCONT Tersus system can comprise up to a maximum of 3 VCU control units, several VHM (OP)
operating panels and up to 2 motor controllers (VMO). A PC running the EasyServe program can be con-
nected for service purposes.
With the exception of EasyServe and the operating elements (VHM, OP) all of the units involved must be
signed on with the parameters in group P01.xx. Units that are not signed on cannot be used and their inputs
and outputs will not be made available by either EasyServe or the operating elements.
Furthermore, up to 2 analog input or output components (VAI or VAO) can be installed.
Caution:
For reasons of safety, it is imperative that the relevant communication error messages should register an
alarm (A) when originating from units that are actively involved in the control loop.
P01.01 Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel set at position A10 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.
AIx: analog input VAI installed
AOx: analog output installed
x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.
P01.02 Analog Channel A11 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel set at position A11 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.

Parameters
P01.03 VCU20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 2 and VIO
software.
P01.04 VCU2: Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A10 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A11 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.
P01.06 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 2
Event Group: SY Number: 02
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.
P01.07 VCU20100-Unit 3 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 3 and VIO
software.

Parameters

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A10 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A11 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed
P01.10 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 3
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.
P01.11 VHM RS485 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 16
The parameter defines the address under which the VHM operating element can reach the
scale via RS485 coupling.
P01.12 VMO20100-Unit 1 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The first unit VMO 201xx is connected to the local bus. The address 11 must be set by
parameter for this unit.

Parameters
P01.13 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 1
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.
P01.14 VMO20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Second VMO 201xx unit is connected to the local bus. The address 12 must be set by pa-
rameter for this unit.
P01.15 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 2
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour

The parameters of this group define system behavior towards the operator and set access authorization.
P02.01 Language Default: DEUTSCH

Alternative: DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
Device dialog language. User-defined texts can be used if OTHER is selected. Texts can
be written and loaded using EasyServe.
P02.02 Units Default: Metric

Alternative: Metric
English
Switches display and parameter entry units from metric (SI units) to non-metric systems
(English). All values entered will be converted automatically.

Parameters
P02.03 Scale Name Default: DISOCONT Tersus

VMC
Letters and characters can be used. The name appears in the upper row of the operating
console and when searching through networks for controllers.
Remark: The characters ";" and "=" are not accepted. During the saving procedure these
characters will automatically be deleted.
P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI Default: NO

Alternative: NO
REMOTE IP
The rights for controlling the scales from the operating console VHM or the user interface of
a browser (HMI) connected via Ethernet can be restricted. The restricted rights apply to the
start and stop commands and the setpoint entry.
Alternatives:
NO: control commands are permitted from all operating locations
REMOTE IP: control commands are possible only from the operating console with the IP
address listed in the following parameters.
Also refer to:

P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1
...
P02.10 Event: Communication HMI 3
P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1 Default: 192.168.240.21
Address of the first operating panel from which control commands should be given.
The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or
P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via RS485.
Also refer to:

P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI
P02.06 Event: Communication HMI 1 Default: IG

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.
Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s.
To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.

Parameters
Address of the second operating panel from which control commands are to be given.
Also refer to:


Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.
The address of the third operating element that control commands are supposed to be giv-
en from.
Also refer to:


Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.

Parameters
P02.11 Event: Communication VHM serial Default: IG

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operat-
ing panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
P02.12 Password Default: 10000

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 1 for access protection of certain functions on the operator panel as per the fol-
lowing parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the 2nd
password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password keyed in is
shown encoded for protection. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 7353
P02.13 2. Password Default: 14389

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 2 for access protection for certain functions on the operator panel as per the
following parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the
2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password entered is
shown encoded on the screen. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 2889
P02.14 Reset Counter 1 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.

Parameters
P02.15 Reset Counter 2 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.16 Batch control Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.17 Switch Grav./Vol. command Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.18 Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.19 Filling control bin weigher Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.20 Prefeeder start/stop Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password

Parameters
P02.21 Loadwheel start/stop Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for the function on the operating console.
P02.22 Data Log ON/OFF Default: Password

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Enables functions Start Data Logging , Stop Data Logging and Clear Data Log File.
Parameters see block Data Logging.
P02.23 Exit Scale Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for the function at the operator panel.
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition

The parameters of this group configure basic functionality.
P03.01 Control Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Switch between feed rate regulation and simple measuring.
YES: metering, feed-rate regulating system

NO: measuring system

Parameters
P03.02 Wheel Continous Operation Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
4 hours
5 hours
6 hours
7 hours
8 hours
9 hours
10 hours
Determining the behavior of the measuring wheel drive.
The measuring wheel is always automatically switched on when measuring is started. Mea-
suring or feeding begins a couple of seconds after the measuring wheel has been switched
on.
YES: The measuring wheel is not switched off when measuring or feeding is switched off.
X hour(s): The measuring wheel is switched off X hours after switching off measuring or
feeding to reduce wear and tear and use of energy due to unnecessary constant operation.
P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate Default: 20000 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
The nominal flow rate is a characteristic value of the scale that acts as a reference value for
threshold values and service displays.
P03.04 Flow Rate Units Default: ---.-- t/h

Alternative: ------ kg/h
----.- kg/h
---.-- kg/h
--.--- kg/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
----.-- kg/min
----.- g/min
-----.- g/h
----.-- g/h
Display format for setpoint and actual feed rate values.

Parameters
P03.05 Counter 1 Unit Default: ----.-- t

Alternative: ------- kg
-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Display format for counter 1.
P03.06 Counter 2 Unit Default: -----.- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Display format for counter 2
P03.07 Counter 3 Unit Default: ------- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Display format for counter 3.

Parameters
P03.08 Pulse Length Total Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 10 s
Duration of an external totalizing counter output impulse.
The weighting of a pulse (WI) is defined by P03.10 Totalizer Increment.
If the impulse duration is shorter than 10 ms the impulse output is disabled. All impulses not
issued yet are cleared.
The output frequency f is approximately Nominal Flow Rate:

f [Hz] = P03.03 / 3600 * P03.10
The output frequency must be ≤ 10 Hz if an external counter is connected.
P03.09 DO: Pulse Counter Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
DO: Selecting the physical output for triggering an external pulse counter for the measured
quantity. Bear in mind the limitations on speed and life cycle when selecting a relay output
and set the weight equivalent for a pulse in P03.10 Totalizer Increment. The duration of the
impulse is set by P03.08 Pulse Length Total.
P03.10 Totalizer Increment Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000 kg
Weight equivalent of an impulse at the output for the external counter as per P03.09 DO:
Pulse Counter.
The DO: Pulse Counter is blocked when setting the valence '0'.
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources

The parameters of this group assign internal signals to the physical outputs.
P04.01 Feeder Start Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
DI
Specifies the device that will turn on the scales.
The digital input is flank-controlled, i.e., the ON signal must be removed and then reapplied
if the scale becomes inoperative because of something like an alarm.

Parameters
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
AI
Determines which signal input gives the flow rate setpoint.
P04.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Min: 0 mA Max: 1000 mA
Input current for the analog setpoint of 100 % of the Nominal Flow Rate.
The range and offset parameters take effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set
to AI.
P04.04 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Min: -200 mA Max: 200 mA
Input current offset for an analog setpoint of 0 % of Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter takes effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.
P04.05 Source Run Enable Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Determines the signal input that gives the scales release signal. This input is generally
used for interlocking with downstream transport equipment.
The setting 'n/a' means that no release is required.
P04.06 Event: Run Disabled Default: W2

Event Group: IL Number: 01
No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched
on.

Parameters
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
OP
AI
A preset feed rate setpoint (compare P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint) can be percentaged by the
VHM operating console or by an analog input. This function is used if the system is to feed
a percentage of an additional material to the original component.
For example:
P04.02 = AI
P04.07 = OP
The effective setpoint is the percentage component, entered into the operating console, of
the absolute setpoint set through the analog input.
If the setpoint is given as per P04.02 by the operating console (P04.02 = OP) or the scales
are in keyboard mode P04.07 will have no effect, i.e. the setpoint entered at the operating
console works as entered.
P04.08 Relativer Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for entry 100%.
P04.09 Relative Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Effective only when P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for an input of 0%.
P04.10 Difference Flow Rate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
AI
Definition of the input channel for a signal that should be subtracted from the measured
flow rate. This function is used when the weigh belt records a material quantity that is both
well-known and still to be measured.
Dependant upon P04.13 Difference Function, further signal processing uses the difference
from the actually measured flow rate and the already known flow rate, meaning the still
unknown flow rate. Therefore, the totalizing counters only add together the additional quan-
tity of bulk solids. The flow rate regulator might receive the additional quantity of bulk solids
as the actual input quantity so that it can be controlled through the prefeeder.

Parameters
P04.11 Difference Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

Effective only when P04.10 Difference Flow Rate = AI.
Current at the analog input for 100 % entry of the nominal flow rate in P03.03 Nominal Flow
Rate
P04.12 Difference Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

Effective only when P04.10 Difference Flow Rate = AI.
Current at the analog input for an input of 0 %.
P04.13 Difference Function Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Control
Display
Control + Display
≠
Effective only when P04.10 Difference Flow Rate n/a.
Definition of the effect of the actual differential flow rate:

NO: The input signal for the actual differential flow rate does not have any effect.
Control: The actual flow rate fed to the flow rate regulator = the measured flow rate − the
actual differential flow rate.
Display: The flow rate display = the measured flow rate − the actual differential flow rate.
Control + display: Both the display and the flow rate regulator use the measured flow rate −
the actual differential flow rate.
Also refer to: P04.10 Difference Flow Rate
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data

The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics.
P05.01 Speed Measurement Default: DI VCU1.DI6 High

Alternative: DI
n/a
Defines the signal input for the optional tachometer impulse signal from the drive motor to
the discharge screw. Speed measuring is switched off if set to 'n/a'.
Speed can only be recorded using input DI6.

Parameters
P05.02 Pulses per Motorrevolution Default: 30 Imp

Min: 1 Imp Max: 1000000 Imp
Effective only when P05.01 Speed Measurement = DI
The number of impulses of the optional tachometer (refer to P05.01 Speed Measurement)
per revolution of the drive motor of the measuring wheel.
P05.03 Nominal Speed Default: 1000 1/min

Min: 1 1/min Max: 3000 1/min
Effective only when P05.01 Speed Measurement = DI...
Reference value for displays and for threshold value messages.
P05.04 LC: Load Measurement Default: LC VCU1.LC1

Alternative: LC
n/a
Definition of the input channel for recording the torque to the measuring wheel.
The characteristic values of the load cell should be keyed into P05.05 LC Characteristic
Value and P05.06 LC Rated Capacity.
LC1, LC2: Recording with a load cell at interface 1 or 2.

LC3: Recording through a load cell rotating with the measuring wheel. Transferring the
measured values to VCU via Bluetooth. In addition, temperature is transmitted by this
channel. Bluetooth communication has to be configurated by keying into P05.09 Loading
cell BT ID1 and/or P05.10 Loading cell BT ID2.
P05.05 LC Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V

Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V
Characteristic value (transmission factor) of the (main) load cell.
P05.06 LC Rated Capacity Default: 100 kg

Min: 0.1 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The total of the load cell rated loads for recording the weight.
P05.07 Lever Arm Default: 60 mm

Min: 0 mm Max: 1000 mm
The length of the lever arm for applying force in the load cell to acquire the torque of the
measuring wheel. You can find the value in the data sheet of the Coriolis meter.

Parameters
P05.08 Wheel Radius Default: 200 mm

Min: 0 mm Max: 1000 mm
The radius of discharge of bulk solids from the measuring wheel.
You can find the value in the data sheet of the Coriolis meter.
P05.09 Loading cell BT ID1 Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00
MAC address of the Bluetooth transmitter in the rotating part of force recording.
Its address can be ascertained with a Bluetooth scanner in the PC.
Only relevant if P05.04 LC: Load Measurement = LC3
P05.10 Loading cell BT ID2 Default: 00:00:00:00:00:00
P05.11 DO Bluetooth Reset Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel that the supply of a Bluetooth transmitter set up exter-
nally can be interrupted with to initialize the equipment. The output becomes active for a
certain period after the Bluetooth coupling breaks down for a couple of seconds.
P05.12 Bluetooth channel broken Default: W2

The event is identified when Bluetooth communication to the rotating component of the
meter has been interrupted.
Possible causes:
- major malfunctions in the surroundings
- the loss of the voltage supply of the rotating Bluetooth transmitter
Actions:
- a brief voltage interruption of VCU and the rotating Bluetooth transmitter for initialization
- check the availability of the rotating Bluetooth transmitter with a scanner in the PC
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control

The parameters of this group describe the control functions of the basic functionality.

Parameters
P06.01 Volumetric Start-Up Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Length of time it takes to begin volumetric operation once the scales have been switched
on. If selected, feeding will switch to gravimetric operation once the startup time has past.
This function improves the startup with an empty feeder.

The optional speed controller is also active during startup.
P06.02 Measuring Delay Default: 5 s

Min: 2 s Max: 60 s
The delay time from starting the measuring wheel to the beginning of the measurement.
This time is determined by the acceleration time of the measuring drive. The speed of the
measuring drive has to be stabilized at the beginning of measuring.
P06.03 T_Volumetric Default: 50 s

Min: 0 s Max: 6000 s
Time for which the filling is monitored in the volumetric phase.
The event defined by P06.04 Event: T_Volum. is identified once this time expires.
P06.04 Event: T_Volum. Default: W1

Event Group: SC Number: 10
This event is identified if the filling time exceeds the threshold value in P06.03
T_Volumetric.
Possible cause:
- storage bin is empty
- storage bin has a blockage
- the filling gate is malfunctioning or is blocked
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring

This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm
(A) and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2).

Parameters
P07.01 Event: Stand-By Default: W2

Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller
than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched
off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value Default: 0 % Io

Min: 0 % Io Max: 100 % Io
If the controller magnitude is below the threshold value, the feed drive is switched off to
protect the motor from overheating.
Also refer to: P07.01 Event: Stand-By
P07.03 Event: Tachometer Input Default: A

Event Group: CA Number: 02
The signals at the feeder drive's impulse speedometer input are outside of the specified
range.
Possible causes:
- there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wiring)
- the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
P07.04 Event: Error LC Input Default: A

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The
load cell may be faulty.
Measures:
- check the cabling and the load cell
- check the load cell
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switched on
even after the error has been rectified.

Parameters
P07.05 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: A

Event Group: HI Number: 01
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of
the load cells.
Measuring range end:

125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited Default: W1

Cause of the event:

Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate in volume-
tric operation.
P07.07 Event: Power Failure Default: A

Event Group: WE Number: 01
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event must
first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales will restart.

Parameters
P07.08 Time Deviation Default: 20 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Duration for which a control deviation above the threshold in P07.09 Threshold Deviation
will be tolerated. The event 'control deviation' is identified once the time has been ex-
ceeded.
Simultaneously P07.08 Time Deviation functions as a time constant for the filter that con-
tains the value of the control deviation. A 'control deviation' event is also identified if the
filtered result exceeds the threshold value P07.11 Deviation abs. max..
Also refer to:

P07.09 Threshold Deviation
P07.10 Factor Deviation
P07.11 Deviation abs. max.
P07.12 Event: Deviation
P07.09 Threshold Deviation Default: 5 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum permissible control deviation.
Reference: P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate.
Also refer to: P07.08 Time Deviation, P07.12 Event: Deviation
P07.10 Factor Deviation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
An event message as per P07.12 Event: Deviation will be identified if the absolute value of
the control deviation for the duration P07.08 Time Deviation is greater than the threshold
P07.09 Threshold Deviation.
With a setpoint of 100%, the effective threshold is always determined by the parameter
P07.09 Threshold Deviation. For lower setpoints the threshold can be reduced with para-
meter P07.10 Factor Deviation.
Examples:
P07.10 = 0 : Effective threshold = P07.09 × Setpoint / P03.03
P07.10 = 1 : Effective threshold = P07.09
P07.11 Deviation abs. max. Default: 100 %

Min: 0.1 % Max: 1000 %
The amount of the control deviation will be filtered (filter time constant: P07.08 Time Devia-
tion). If the filter output exceeds the limit set here a 'control deviation' event will be identified
(P07.12 Event: Deviation). The filter is reset when the scales are switched off.

Parameters
P07.12 Event: Deviation Default: A

Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the setpoint
over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
- material has been incorrectly handled:
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- arching in the feed hopper
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
- the controller has at times come against its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output regu-
lator settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical value that
minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable operation.
Also refer to: P07.11 Deviation abs. max., P07.10 Factor Deviation, P07.09 Threshold Dev-
iation, P07.08 Time Deviation
P07.13 Event: Controller Limited Default: W2

Event Group: CO Number: 01
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response thre-
shold. After a time message HI05 (P07.12) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service value Y).
At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.
P07.14 Event: Memory Default: A

The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during
that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.

Parameters
P07.15 Event: Analog Input < Offset Default: A

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input sig-
nal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters

The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the
time set if there is an abrupt change in the signal.
Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display.
P08.01 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value
should be left at the factory setting.
Note: filtering the load cell signal also effects the regulating action.
P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display and for outputs of the actual flow rate at the operating
element, EasyServe and fieldbus. Has no effect on the feeder regulation.
P08.03 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the 'actual flow rate' analog output. The filter can have an impact on
the control characteristics with an externally closed control circuit through the analog value.
P08.04 Filter: Load Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for outputting the measured value for the load on the measuring wheel.
P08.05 Filter: Deviation Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for all displays and printouts of the control deviation.

Parameters
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values

The parameters of this group define the limits for process values and specify the event classes of the asso-
ciated events.
Events that can only occur with regular feed operation are only monitored 10 s after beginning feed opera-
tion.
P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: 5 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Lower threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate
P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: W1

Event Group: LO Number: 02
The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too low
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: 120 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Upper threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate
P09.04 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: W1

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too large

Parameters
P09.05 Value for Load-Max Default: 100 % LC

Min: -10 % LC Max: 200 % LC
The upper threshold value for the load on the measuring wheel.
Also refer to: P09.06 Event: Maximum Load
P09.06 Event: Maximum Load Default: A

This event is identified when the force on the measuring wheel exceeds the upper threshold
value.
Possible causes:
- bulk solids blocked in the area of the measuring wheel
- measuring wheel covered
Steps to be taken:
Open the MULTICOR equipment and check the measuring wheel for friction
P09.07 Speed-Min Value Default: 5 % n

Min: -10 % n Max: 200 % n
Speed threshold value.
Reference value: P05.03 Nominal Speed
P09.08 Event: Speed-Min Default: W1

The speed of the measuring wheel has dropped below the lower threshold value. Measur-
ing the flow rate is afflicted with major defects. The free flow of bulk solids through the unit
is obstructed.
Possible causes:
- the measuring drive is blocked by bulk solids or foreign particles
- there is a defect in the motor of the measuring drive
Actions:
- open the equipment and check the measuring wheel for friction
- check the drive train, motor and motor's drive
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data

The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values
that have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No
readjustment is necessary.

Parameters
P10.01 Range Correction Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
The parameter affects the load measurement F proportionally.
Q(corrected) = Q(measured) * P10.01
P10.02 Basic Tare Default: 0 kg/h

Min: -1000000 kg/h Max: 1000000 kg/h
The result of the TW: Tare calibration program in accordance with the dead weight without
the flow of bulk solids.
P10.03 Tare Correction Default: 0 kg/h

Min: -1000000 kg/h Max: 1000000 kg/h
The results of the >0< Zero Set calibration program or automatic zero setting.
P10.04 Zeroing Limit Default: 4 % Io

Maximum permissible value of the sum of all zeroing operations of the manual or automatic
zeroing system.
The reference: Nominal Flow Rate (service value)
P10.05 Calibration Time Default: 30 s

Min: 1 s Max: 60 s
Duration of the adjustment program.
P10.06 Tare Correction Check Default: 0 kg/h

Min: -1000000 kg/h Max: 1000000 kg/h
The parameter contains the results of the tare correction from the automatic check mea-
surement.
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller

The parameters of this group define the behavior of the flow rate controller. P03.01 Control = YES has to be
set in order to use the controller.
Also refer to the controller block diagrams in chapter 'Appendix'.

Parameters
P11.01 Controller Type Default: Continuous

Alternative: Continuous
Stepping
The type of controller that is active in the VCU for the flow rate. Effective parameters differ
for the various types of controllers.
Continuous: A continuous controller magnitude is issued to the controller for the prefeeder.
This setting should be used for continually rotating prefeeders and position-controlled pre-
feeders with built-in position regulation.
Also refer to: P12.16 AO: Motor Speed Control
Stepping: Control commands are issued for a feed gate that is position-controlled by the
VCU.
Also refer to: P39.01 S: DO Open Flow Gate to P39.12 Position MAX Flow Gate
P11.02 P-Component KP Default: 0.02 mA/%

Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
Proportional component of the controller for the flow rate.
Only relevant to P11.01 Controller Type = Continuous
P11.03 I-Component TN Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The reset time of the integral component of the flow rate controller.
Only relevant to P11.01 Controller Type = continuous
P11.04 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Lower limit for the regulator actuating variable.
If transfer is made with currents of between 4 ... 20 mA, the parameter must be set to 4 mA
at least. P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset must be set to a value equal to or greater than
P11.04 Lower Limit.
Also refer to: P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset

Parameters
P11.05 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

The upper limit for the controller magnitude.
This limit depends on the size of the setpoint with inputs less than 20 mA.
Also refer to:

A description of the effect of the upper limit can be found in chapter 'Appendix'
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA

Offset of the actuating variable by a constant value. The offset takes effect before the limi-
tation of the actuating variable.
Generally the same values are chosen for P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset as for
P11.04 Lower Limit.
Optimization:
- fill the feeder hopper with bulk material
- calculate the actuating variable Y1, the value at which the discharge unit begins to work
- calculate the actuating variable Y2, the value at which reduction of the feed is suspended.
For feeders that are operated with flow rate setpoints of 0:
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y2
All other feeders:
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y1
Note: P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset must be equal to or greater than P11.04 Lower
Limit.
P11.07 Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
If the scales are switched off the actuating variable can be set to 0 or to the offset value in
the 'lower limit' parameter.
0: the actuating variable is set to 0 when the scales are switched off.
Lower limit: the actuating variable is set to the lower limit.

Parameters
P11.08 Bypass Default: 10 mA

The controller magnitude to the prefeeder is calculated from a portion from the controller
and a portion calculated through the bypass constant from the flow rate set value. The cur-
rent should be set in P11.08 at which the prefeeder supplies the nominal flow rate (P03.03
Nominal Flow Rate).
P11.09 Store Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES-A
Saving the control value after turning off the scale. The next start will begin with this value.
NO : do not save
YES : save
YES-A : only save if the scale has not broken down due to an alarm.
P11.10 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord Default: 2 s

1st-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
P11.11 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord Default: 0 s

2nd-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
P11.12 S: P-Component Default: 0.033 s/%

Min: 0 s/% Max: 1000 s/%
The proportion of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder.
Only relevant if P11.01 Controller Type = Stepping

Parameters
P11.13 S: I-Component Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The reset time of the integral component of the position controller for the position-controlled
prefeeder.
P11.14 S: Threshold Response Default: 0.1 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
The minimum waiting period between two adjustment steps. This parameter can be used to
prevent continuous vibration of the prefeeder around the operating point.
P11.15 Compensation Element Default: 0 1/s

Min: 0 1/s Max: 60000 1/s
The compensation element is an additional integrator in the control deviation branch that
only works in gravimetric operation. It is used to
- overcoming the trigger threshold.
- reducing contouring errors with monotonically changing malfunctions.
- avoid remaining deviations with a non-symmetrical actuator and cyclical malfunctions.
The input and output of the compensation element are limited to 5 %. Special case: P11.15
= 0: The integrator is cleared.
P11.16 KP Adaptation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 2
This parameter can be used to evaluate the proportional KP component of the constant
controller dependant upon the flow rate set value.
For example:
P11.16 = 1: KP = P11.02 independent of the setpoint.
P11.16 = 0: KP decreases in proportion to the setpoint.
P11.16 = 2: KP increases in proportion to the setpoint.
P11.17 Setpoint Threshold Default: 0 % Io

This parameter can be used to set a plant optimally to start-up or operating performance.
For example:
P11.17 = 0: The proportional component is evaluated as described with parameter P11.16
KP Adaptation.
P11.17 > 0: The controller input is evaluated with the parameter P11.16 KP Adaptation
below this threshold. The controller input remains without influence above this threshold.
Only relevant to P11.01 Controller Type = continuous

Parameters
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs

The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels. On the VCU 20104
controller only one analog channel is available and it is set to feedrate feedback by default.
P12.01 AO: Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the flow rate set value.
Also refer to: P12.02 Setpoint Offset, P12.03 Setpoint Range
P12.02 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the flow rate set value of 0 %.
Reference: P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of a flow rate set value of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the actual flow rate.
Also refer to: P12.05 Flow Rate Offset, P12.06 Flow Rate Range
P12.05 Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate

Parameters
P12.06 Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.07 AO: Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the torque on the measuring wheel.
Also refer to: P12.08 Load Offset, P12.09 Load Range
P12.08 Load Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the torque from zero on the measuring wheel.
P12.09 Load Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the nominal torque (the calculated service value) on the measuring
wheel
P12.10 AO: Speed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the speed of the measuring wheel.
Also refer to: P12.11 Speed Offset, P12.12 Speed Range
P12.11 Speed Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the zero speed of the measuring wheel.
P12.12 Speed Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the nominal speed of the measuring wheel.
Reference: P05.03 Nominal Speed

Parameters
P12.13 AO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the control deviation.
Also refer to: P12.14 Deviation Offset, P12.15 Deviation Range
P12.14 Deviation Offset Default: 4 mA

The value of the control deviation 'zero' lies between the offset and 20 mA.
Also refer to: P12.13 AO: Deviation
P12.15 Deviation Range Default: 20 mA

The output current is calculated according to the following formula:
Current = 10 mA + (P12.14)/2 + (P12.15 - P12.14) × control deviation / 100 %
Reference value: P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate
P12.16 AO: Motor Speed Control Default: AO VCU1.AO1

Alternative: AO
n/a
Analog output channel for the actuating variable Y of the flow rate regulator.
Also refer to:

- the parameters in the 'regulator' block
- the regulator diagram in chapter 'Appendix'
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input
channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard
wired on the controller and cannot be changed.
P13.01 Event: External Event 1 Default: A

External interference signal at fault input 1.
Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive

Parameters
P13.02 DI: External Event 1 Default: DI VCU1.DI1 Low

Alternative: DI
n/a
Input 1 for an external interference signal.
The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking).
Also refer to: P13.01 Event: External Event 1
P13.03 Event: External Event 2 Default: A

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.
P13.04 DI: External Event 2 Default: DI VCU1.DI2 Low

Alternative: DI
n/a
P13.05 Event: External Event 3 Default: IG

P13.06 DI: External Event 3 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters
P13.07 Event: External Event 4 Default: IG

P13.08 DI: External Event 4 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P13.09 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 Default: A

The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level.
Possible cause:
- cable to the sensor is broken
- the sensor is faulty
- there is a short circuit in the cable connection
- an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level
P13.10 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 Default: A

Possible cause:

Parameters
P13.11 Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 Default: IG

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Parameters
P13.15 DI: Acknowledge Events Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for acknowledging event messages.
Caution: the level is static and may not be on permanently (otherwise continuous acknowl-
edgement).
P13.16 DI: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Feedback from the local operating console VLG that has been switched to 'local'.
The DISOCONT Tersus is now a passive display device only. It is switched to 'volumetric'
automatically to suppress event messages. The DISOCONT Tersus switches itself off when
it is switched back.
P13.17 DI: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for switching the scales to volumetric operation, not synchronized with previous
operation.
Also refer to: P13.18 DI: Volumetric synchron
P13.18 DI: Volumetric synchron Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Switches to volumetric operation while the actuating variable continues continuously. The
actuating variable is calculated as an average of the actuating variable obtained during
regular operation. Alterations to the feed rate setpoint automatically adjust the actuating
variable.
Also refer to: P13.17 DI: Volumetric Mode
P13.19 DI: Reset Totalizer 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for canceling totalizing counter 1. The positive flank is the actuator.

Parameters
P13.20 DI: Reset Totalizer 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for clearing totalizing counter 2. The positive flank takes effect.
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output
channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P14.01 DO: Wheel Start Default: DO VCU1.DO2 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
The definition of the output channels for switching on the measuring wheel.
Also refer to: P03.02 Wheel Continous Operation
P14.02 DO: Feeder Started Default: DO VCU1.DO3 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
Digital output signal used to display the ON or OFF scales states.
P14.03 DO: Start Prefeeder Default: DO VCU1.DO1 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
The digital output for turning the prefeeder on or off.
P14.04 DO: ALARM Default: DO VCU1.DO4 Low

Alternative: DO
n/a
The output becomes active if any alarm is triggered (common alarm). The scales have
failed.
P14.05 DO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the monitoring activates the control deviation
(P07.12 Event: Deviation).
This contact output is independent of the event class.

Parameters
P14.06 DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if the feed rate falls below the minimum feed rate (P09.01
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN).
The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.07 DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the maximum feed rate (P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX) is exceeded.
The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.08 DO: Load MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the platform load is in excess of its upper threshold value.
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
Also refer to: P09.05 Value for Load-Max
P14.09 DO: n-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the drive speed of the measuring wheel has dropped
below its lower threshold value P09.07 Speed-Min Value.
The output is independent of the event class setting.
P14.10 DO: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to a volumetric mode.
P14.11 DO: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to local mode.

Parameters
P14.12 DO: WARNING Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if any warning is pending.
P14.13 DO: Keyboard Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when keyboard mode is preselected.
(The DISOCONT Tersus is operated using the operating console VHM or EasyServe).
P14.14 DO Volum Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Volumetric mode is selected and the digital output is set if communication with the Blu-
etooth measuring module fails. Volumetric mode is selected if both channels fail when re-
dundant measuring channels have been installed (refer to P05.09 Loading cell BT ID1 to
P05.12 Bluetooth channel broken). In this case, the output P14.14 DO Volum Mode be-
comes active.
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode

The parameters of this group define and optimize behavior in batch mode. Batching mode is used to ensure
that the feeder turns off independantly after conveying a preset quantity.
Also refer to the chapter in the manual:

'General Diagram' → 'Batching'
'Appendix' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.01 Batch Mode Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Sets whether batch mode can be run or not.
In addition, 'batching' 'selection' has to be selected with the operating menu .
Also refer to the chapter in the manual:

'General Diagram' → 'Batching'
'Appendix' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
AI
Establish the source that will determine the batch.

Parameters
P15.03 Adaptation Time Default: 3 s

Establishes the duration of the entire dribble feed phase.
P15.04 Correction Amount Default: 0 kg

Min: -100000 kg Max: 1000000 kg
The start of the adaptation time is shifted by this quantity. An adaptation time = 0 corres-
ponds to a pre-threshold.
The correction quantity should be set to 0 for initial startup. The value of Correction Amount
is adapted after each batch if P15.05 Adaptation Factor is not equal to zero so that the
defect of the next batch is minimized.
P15.05 Adaptation Factor Default: 0.5

Min: 0 Max: 1
The application point of the switch-off function is adapted automatically so that the system
is better adapted to the actual conditions for the next batch.
Adaptation Factor = 0 : no adaptation

Adaptation Factor = 1 : full adaptation
Interim values result in filtered adjustment; this should be used in particular for systems with
poor reproducibility.
The result of the event is stored in P15.04 Correction Amount.
P15.04 NEW = P15.04 OLD - Batch Residual Amount * P15.05
P15.06 Batch Automatic Record Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES: automatic print after each completed batch.
NO: Printout of the batch can only be made via menu.
The printout can be made only after a batch has ended automatically or manually. The
printout is stored to a file that can be read using the Web-Server.
P15.07 DI: Batch Terminate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input signal for stopping a current batch.

Parameters
P15.08 DO: Batch Running Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if a batch is run.
The signal is active at the start of the batch and deactivated again when the batch has been
completed. It remains active if batch operation is continuous.
P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active in the dribble feed phase.
P15.10 DO: Full Feed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active in the full feed phase.
P15.11 Analog Setpoint Relat. Default: 1000 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Effective only when P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source = AI
The batch setpoint resulting for an input flow corresponding to the parameter P15.12 Batch
Setpoint Range.
P15.12 Batch Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Input current for a batch setpoint that corresponds to P15.11 Analog Setpoint Relat..
P15.13 Batch Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Input current for a batch setpoint of 0. Negative values can bridge the input area.
For example:
P15.11 = 1000 kg
P15.12 = 20 mA
P15.13 = -20 mA
0 ... 20 mA then correspond to 500 ... 1000 kg

Parameters
P15.14 Batch Tolerance Default: 100000 kg

If the batch lies outside of the tolerance range, the maximum alteration of
the correction quantity at adaptation is the entered tolerance value. Also, an event is identi-
fied.
Also refer to: P15.15 Event: Out of Tolerance
P15.15 Event: Out of Tolerance Default: W2

Event Group: MF Number: 06
The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces
P15.16 Batch Setpoint Limit Default: 1000000 kg

Min: 1 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Upper threshold for batch setpoint entry. The threshold is used to prevent incorrect entries
and thus overflows.
Also refer to: P15.17 Event: Batch setpoint Limit
P15.17 Event: Batch setpoint Limit Default: W1

Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible upper
limit in P15.16 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.16 Batch Setpoint Limit
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval

The parameters of this group define maintenance intervals and the internal accuracy analysis function.

Parameters
P16.01 Maintenance Electric Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the power supply. This parameter defines the interval between maintenance work.
Also refer to: P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric
P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric Default: IG

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P16.01
Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.
P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the scales (scales ON). This parameter defines the interval between maintenance
work.
Also refer to: P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run
P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run Default: IG

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03 Main-
tenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe

The parameters of this group define the parameters for serial communication with EasyServe via RS232 or
RS485. These parameters have no function if EasyServe is connected via Ethernet.

Parameters
P17.01 Own Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485.
All devices connected to the communicatio bus must have disjunct addresses.
Also refer to: P17.02 Baud Rate, P17.03 Format Data
P17.02 Baud Rate Default: 38400

Alternative: 38400
Data transfer speed. This parameter is used for information only. The speed cannot be
changed.
P17.03 Format Data Default: 8-N-1

Alternative: 8-N-1
Formats the serial data. The value is used for information only and cannot be altered.
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Communication

Communication Fieldbus
The parameters of this group define the communication procedure to be used to a higher-level plant control
system and configure the data link.
Details on the fieldbus interface can be found in the following manuals:

DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468

Parameters
P18.01 Protocol Type Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Modbus-RTU
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Modbus-TCP
Ethernet/IP
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card.
DISOCONT Tersus: Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual
BV-H2406. Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2448) contains further information on the
data structures.
INTECONT Tersus: Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2474) contains further information
on the data structures.
NO: Modbus-TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
Modbus-RTU: RS232, RS422 or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface card VSS 28020 must
be installed.
PROFIBUS DP: Fieldbus interface card VPB 28020 must be installed.
DeviceNet: Fieldbus interface card VCB 28020 must be installed.
Modbus-TCP: Complete communication (read/write) using Ethernet and the main VCU
RJ45 plug.
Ethernet/IP: Communication via Ethernet and the RJ45 plug on the main VCU.
The red-coded RJ45 socket X96 may not be used for communication with the host comput-
er.
P18.02 Timeout Host Default: 10 s

Min: 1 s Max: 600 s
Monitors the interface
A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in
P18.02 is greater than zero.
P18.03 Event: Cyclic Communication Default: A

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been inter-
rupted for longer than the timeout-period in P18.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.

Parameters
P18.04 Event: Acyclic Communication Default: W2

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
P18.05 Check in Keyboard Mode Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
To be able to use keyboard mode as emergency operation if coupling fails (without having
to log off the fieldbus coupling), this parameter can be used
to deactivate fieldbus communication monitoring in keyboard mode.
This allows the scales to be operated even if the fieldbus link fails.
P18.06 Compatibility DISOCONT Master Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Compatibility setting for the predecessor electronics systems DISOCONT or INTECONT
PLUS.
NO: Not completely compatible

YES: compatible, but with restricted data link compatibility for new functions
P18.07 Word Sequence Default: I:std/L:std

Alternative: I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word.
I → denotes IEEE 754 values (floating-point values)

L → denotes LONG values (4 byte integer values)
std → will not swap the word order
swp → will swap the word order
P18.08 Byte Sequence Default: High - Low

Alternative: High - Low
Low - High
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.

Parameters
P18.09 Configuration Default: FIXED_8_16

Alternative: NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
FIXED_8_8
FIXED_4_4
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
FIXED COMPATIBLE
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a de-
tailed description in the manuals for data communication:
The contents of the data have to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is
compatible to one another!
P18.10 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Address of the device as a slave at the modbus.
Each address may be used at a bus once only.
P18.11 Resolution Default: 4096

Min: 1 Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value trans-
ferred.
The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
P18.12 Baud rate Default: 19200

Alternative: 9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
Data transfer rate at Modbus-RTU.

Parameters
P18.13 Data Format Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
Modbus-RTU always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Example: 8-O-1 means:

1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit
N = No parity
O = Odd parity
E = Even parity
P18.14 Physics Default: RS232

Alternative: RS485-2-wire
RS485-4-wire
RS232
Selects the electrical interface type (Modbus RTU)

Min: 0 Max: 126
Address of the slave at the PROFIBUS
P18.16 FLOAT-Format Default: IEEE

Alternative: IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parame-
ters.

Min: 0 Max: 63
The address of the weighing electronics on DeviceNet
P18.18 Baud rate Default: 125K

Alternative: 125K
250K
500K
Data transfer rate of the DeviceNet.

Parameters
P18.19 Parameter Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P18.20 Preset Count Default: 2

Min: 2 Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order
plant control system.
P18.21 READ_ID Count Default: 6

Min: 0 Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales→ master) that are
queried in a telegram.
P18.22 Access Rights Limitation FB Default: NO

Alternative: NO
FIRST WRITE
REMOTE IP
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a
controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights.
The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P18.23
Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
P18.23 Remote IP Address FB Default: 192.168.240.250
IP address of the subscriber with control rights for Modbus-TCP.
Also refer to: P18.22 Access Rights Limitation FB
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration

Configuration of the data in fieldbus communication 'FIXED' mode that were exchanged with the host com-
puter via serial interface.
Also refer to: P18.09 Configuration
For the available data and their Ids see the separated communication manual:

Parameters

P19.01 ID Preset Value 1 Default: 320
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the Fieldbus telegram. It can-
not be changed in this parameter.
The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the 'data com-
munication' manual:
Corresponds to P19.01 ID Preset Value 1

Parameters
P19.09 ID Read Value 1 Default: 752
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The
number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual:
As P19.09 ID Read Value 1

Parameters

Parameters
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet

The parameters in this group control the Ethernet ports. It is necessary to provide inputs when EasyServe, a
VHM operating element or a host computer is supposed to be connected via Ethernet.
You can find information on the selection of addresses in the BV-H2406 manual.
P20.01 IP Address Default: 192.168.240.1
IP address of the weighing electronics. If the control system is integrated into an Ethernet
network, the address must be chosen in agreement with the network administrator. In iso-
lated networks we recommend the factory setting 192.168.240.x. "x" allows for selection of
the system on the bus.
P20.02 Net Mask Default: 255.255.255.0
The net mask setting is based on the local network type.

In general the following setting is used: 255.255.255.0
See also: P20.02 Net Mask, system manual BV-H2406
P20.03 Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0
Generally no input is required. Typical value: 0.0.0.0
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block

Block 21 - PLC Outputs
Applicable only when physical DISOCONT Tersus outputs are controlled by the control system.
The DISOCONT Tersus allows physical output signals to be controlled directly by the control system com-
puter via fieldbus. The parameters of this group assign physical channels to the fieldbus commands.
Please also refer to: status of fieldbus protocol commands in manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communica-
tion' (BV-H2448).
P21.01 DO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO
Corresponds to P21.01 DO: PLC 1

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters
P21.09 AO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
P21.10 AO: PLC 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P21.09 AO: PLC 1
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher

In addition to the weighfeeder, the system supports weighing and bin level control of an additional hopper.
This hopper is often a control hopper for the continuous weighfeeder.
P22.01 Bin Weigher Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Simulation
Tube Calibrator
The bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales.
It has the following functions:
1. displaying the bin weight
2. registering and monitoring threshold values
3. regulating the (min/max) level
4. the check scale for the check system
It can also be filled via menu.
The continuous fill level can also be regulated via block Bin Level Controller.
NO: No weighed bin available
YES: Standard bin without special functions
Simulation: bin regulation and min/max regulation are simulated.

The continuous scale draws off material and filling is done with 4 × P03.03.
Tube Calibrator: A check bin with special functions is used.

Also refer to: P26.01 DI: CO-Alarm Hopper to P26.10 Event: Min KME Setpoint

Parameters
P22.02 LC: Load Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LC
AI
FB
Definition of the measuring channel
If FB or AI are selected the external value will be converted to a value with mV/V units that
corresponds to a measurement from a load cell. The following signal processing calculates
weight in kg from the signal in mV/V and is identical for all input types.
Also refer to:

P22.02 LC: Load Measurement
P22.03 LC Characteristic Value
If AI is selected, refer also to:

P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range

Transfer factor of the load cell as per the data sheet. All load cells have to have the same
nominal value.
Also refer to: P22.04 LC Rated Capacity

Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the bin's load cell rated capacities. All load cells must have the same rated data.
Special case of a partially-weighed bin:

If a bin is only supported x % by load cells at WZnominal1 nominal load sum and is other-
wise supported on non-weighed supports (fixed bearings), the load cell rated capacity to be
entered is given by
P22.04 = WZnenn1 × 100 % / x %
If the percentage component x % on the load cell is not known a priori, the nominal value is
determined by externally weighing one bin level.
Also refer to: P22.03 LC Characteristic Value

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Time constant of the load cell filter.
The load cell filter affects all measuring load related measuring values.

Parameters
P22.06 Bipolar Measurement Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Switches the measuring range for the load cell amplifier.
NO: measurement can be made in one load direction only

YES: the load cell can measure both compression and tensile forces
As there is generally always an initial load on the load cell it is usually sufficient to analyze
the signal in the direction of compression only. The YES setting is needed in rare special
cases only, e.g. if a measuring eye is used to record weight.
Bipolar measurement reduces the resolution of the measuring signal.
P22.07 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) Default: W1

Steps to take :
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched
on even after the error has been rectified.
P22.08 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: W1

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P22.09 Nominal Bin Load Default: 100 % LC

Min: 0 % LC Max: 1000 % LC
The nominal bin level is the reference value for threshold values and analog outputs. It is
given as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P22.04 LC Rated Capacity).

Parameters
P22.10 Display Format Default: ---.--- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Select the dimension and the decimal places for displays.
P22.11 Display Filter Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Time constant of the filter for displaying the weight value.
The filter applies to the display and to the analog or serial printout but not for threshold
values or control contacts.
P22.12 Control Level MIN Default: 60 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using MIN and MAX levels (output P22.14 DO: Bin Filling).
Switched on if the bin level underruns the MIN level and switched off again when the MAX
level is reached.
Reference value: P22.09 Nominal Bin Load
See also: P22.13 Control Level MAX
P22.13 Control Level MAX Default: 70 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using the MIN and MAX control levels (output P22.14 DO:
Bin Filling). If the fill level drops below MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again
when it reaches MAX.
Also refer to: P22.12 Control Level MIN

Parameters
P22.14 DO: Bin Filling Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output to start the filling procedure.
The output is set to 'do not fill' each time a scales alarm is triggered.
Also refer to: P22.12 Control Level MIN, P22.13 Control Level MAX
P22.15 Bin Level MIN Default: 5 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
MIN threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P22.16 Event: Bin Level MIN, P22.17 DO: Bin Level MIN
P22.16 Event: Bin Level MIN Default: W1

The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
Also refer to: P22.15 Bin Level MIN
P22.17 DO: Bin Level MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output signal 'bin level too low'.
The output becomes active if the fill level underruns the lower threshold value. It operates
independent of the event class of the corresponding event.
P22.18 Bin Level MAX Default: 120 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
Max threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P22.19 Event: Bin Level MAX, P22.20 DO: Bin Level MAX

Parameters
P22.19 Event: Bin Level MAX Default: W1

The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
Also refer to: P22.18 Bin Level MAX
P22.20 DO: Bin Level MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output in case the hopper fill level exceeds the upper threshold.
P22.21 AO: Bin Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the hopper fill level.
Also refer to: P22.22 AO: Offset, P22.23 AO: Range
P22.22 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for a bin weight of 0 %.
See also:
P22.21 AO: Bin Load
P22.23 AO: Range
P22.09 Nominal Bin Load
P22.23 AO: Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for a fill weight of 100 %.
See also: P22.21 AO: Bin Load, P22.22 AO: Offset

Parameters

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter is used to correct the measuring result. It is set automatically by the calibra-
tion program CB: Weight Check'.
The measuring result is corrected using the factor in P22.24.
P22.25 Tare (Bin) Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The tare is calculated automatically by the calibration program TW: Tare' and set into this
parameter.
P22.26 Calibration Weight Default: 10 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Used to enter the test weights used for the calibration program CB: Weight Check.
P22.27 Controller in OFF-Mode Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter defines whether the filling weight control (P22.12 Control Level MIN, P22.13
Control Level MAX, P22.14 DO: Bin Filling) and bin regulation (block: bin level controller)
are always active or only when the scale is switched on.
P22.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for a bin load sensor. The probe has the function of keeping the bin from over-
flowing. If the sensor is activated, filling is discontinued for 60 seconds or is aborted.
- output as per P22.14 DO: Bin Filling to OFF
- output as per P23.04 DO: Feeder ON to OFF
- controller magnitude (P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level) to 0 and controller in
base position
Filling is aborted regardless of the filling source (regulator, controller, manual)
and the event class (P22.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor).

Parameters
P22.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor Default: W1

The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shut-
ting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P22.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjust-
ment of the calculation of the flow rate.
P22.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

Raising the analog input for the bin fill level of the additional bin
The input current corresponding to a signal of 0 mV/V.

Effective only when P22.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (such as analog and field-
bus) for DMS inputs'
P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The sensitivity adjustment of the analog input for weighing the additional bin
Converting the analog value into the voltage signal corresponding to a load cell:
The measured value [mV/V] = (input current – P22.30) / (P22.31 – P22.30) * P22.03
where:
P22.30 = Bin Level analog Input Offset
P22.31 = Bin Level analog Input Range
P22.03 = LC Characteristic Value
Effective only when P22.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → 'Using alternative signals (such as analog and field-
bus) for DMS inputs'

Parameters
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller

This continuous controller keeps the fill level in the bin at the setpoint level.
Precondition: weight measurement of the separate bin has been activated (P22.01 Bin Weigher Active =
YES).
Digital control of the separate bin filling can be found in the Bin Weigher block.
Details on the controller and the controller block diagram can be found in the appendix.
P23.01 Bin Controller ON Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates the continuous controller for the fill level of the additional bin.
Also refer to: P22.01 Bin Weigher Active
P23.02 Filling Type Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the standard direction.
YES: The controlled organ fills the bin.

NO: The controlled organ empties the bin.
P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Output signal for the fill level controller actuating variable.
P23.04 DO: Feeder ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output channel for switching on the continuous feed element (control element).
The output is set to off, the controller magnitude is set to 0 and the controller is put into the
base position with every scale alarm. The automatic check system (KME) does the regulat-
ing during its measuring phase.
P23.05 Setpoint Bin Level Default: 0 kg

Setpoint for the hopper in normal operation.

Parameters
P23.06 Feeder Constant Default: 0 (kg/h)/mA

Min: 0 (kg/h)/mA Max: 1000000 (kg/h)/mA
Proportional constant of the conveyor element. The parameter designates the flow rate for
a current of 1 mA at the output P23.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level.
P23.07 Dead Time TT Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Transport times between the regulated conveyor element (control element) and the bin if
the transporting feeder element has a fixed conveying speed.
P23.08 P-Component KP Default: 0 mA/kg

Min: 0 mA/kg Max: 10000 mA/kg
Proportional component of the fill level controller.
An I controller results at KP = 0 that leads to a control circuit with an instable structure with
this regulation. This setting should therefore be avoided.
P23.09 I-Component TN Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the controller integral component for the bin fill level. The integral component
reaches the same magnitude during this period as the proportion with a constant control
deviation.
The integral component is switched off at P23.09 I-Component TN = 0.
P23.10 D Portion TV Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Differential component of the bin fill level controller.
The differential component is switched off if P23.10 D Portion TV = 0.
P23.11 D Filter TD Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Filter time constant for the differential component.
This value should not be greater than the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3 * P23.10 is normal.
Also refer to: P23.10 D Portion TV

Parameters
P23.12 Bypass Default: 10 mA

Constant for pilot control of the conveyor into a bin that is emptied by the continuous scale.
This constant describes the current as a controller magnitude that produces a flow rate at
the conveyor bin corresponding to the nominal flow rate (P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate) of the
continuous scale.
The bypass is adjusted so that the fill level of the bin is retained (outflow = inflow) if the
controller is switched off (P23.08 P-Component KP, P23.09 I-Component TN, P23.10 D
Portion TV = 0) and the scale is switched on.
The bypass can be changed in small increments until the service value yBi oscillates
around 0, even if the controller is active.
(The designs with different signs apply correspondingly to P23.02 Filling Type = NO.)
P23.13 Bypass D Portion Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
In critical circumstances such as with a small hopper or long dead time, the D portion for
the bypass can relieve the controller if there are large changes in weighfeeder setpoints.
The control deviation time interval can be minimized.
Recommendation: 0 under normal circumstances and approximately TT/2 (P23.07 Dead
Time TT) under critical circumstances
P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA

Increase of the actuating variable for the conveyor element.
In general parameters P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P23.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.
P23.15 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Internal lower threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
In general parameters P23.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P23.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.
P23.16 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

Upper threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.

Parameters
P23.17 Dead Band Deviation Default: 0 kg

The effective control deviation Xd(w) at the controller input can be reduced by the factor of
P23.18 Dead Band Factor within a range of ± P23.17 Dead Band Deviation. This can bring
about more settled (slower) control in the stable state (near the setpoint) for the bin weight
with malfunctions in the weight signal.
P23.18 Dead Band Factor Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 1
Factor for the control deviation for a fill level close to the setpoint.
Also refer to: P23.17 Dead Band Deviation
P23.19 Setpoint Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
The setpoint filter for the fill level setpoint.
This can prevent overshoot with setpoint changes effected by the check system (KME).
P23.20 Flow Rate Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
Time constant for the filter in the fill level actual value. Rapid control reaction requires a low
time constant.
The value set is automatically taken into account by the calibration program BIN: Controller
Optimization'.
P23.21 DI: Init. Controller Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Contact initializes all parts of the controller that store information. Bypass and increase only
are active as long as this is applied.
P23.22 Bin Setpoint source Default: PARAMETER

Alternative: PARAMETER
FB
This parameter defines whether the fill level setpoint is given by parameter P23.05 Setpoint
Bin Level or by the fieldbus interface (ID: hex 0x0266 or dec 614).

Parameters
P23.23 Stepper Default: no Stepper

Alternative: no Stepper
additional Stepper
only Stepper
An additional step controller can be activated to the control unit of a position-controlled
prefeeder (feed gate or roller) for the bin controller. The simplified diagram of the controller
can be found in the appendix. The position controller controls the prefeeder with the digital
'Open' and 'Close' signals.
No stepper: only the continuous controller is active

Only stepper: only the position controller is active
Additional stepper: A position controller tops
the continuous controller
The parameter of the continuous controller: P23.07 Dead Time TT - P23.22 Bin Setpoint
source
The parameter of the position controller: P23.24 S: P-Component - P23.40 Position MAX
Flow Gate(B)
P23.24 S: P-Component Default: 0.033 s/%

Min: 0 s/% Max: 1000 s/%
The proportional component of the step controller in transit time per % of deviation (in per-
cent of P22.09 Nominal Bin Load)
P23.25 S: I-Component Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The reset time of the fill level controller is the time after which the same controller magni-
tude develops on the output of the integrator with a constant deviation as through the pro-
portional component.
The integral component serves to avoid a permanent deviation. When the reset time is too
small, it makes the control circuit instable.
The integral component is switched off for TN = 0 s and the controller works as a three-
point switch.
P23.26 S: D-Component Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The factor for the differential component of the fill level controller. The differential compo-
nent can improve the control quality with long conveying routes to the bin. When the value
is too large, it makes the control circuit instable.

Parameters
P23.27 S: Threshold Resp. Default: 0.1 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
The trigger threshold is used to prevent constant small positioning movements around the
operating point. The prefeeder stands still if the deviation is smaller than P23.27.
The trigger threshold should be greater than the smallest possible step of the actuator.
Special case: threshold = 0 %: The smallest allowed trigger threshold has an internal effect.
P23.28 S: Compensation Element Default: 0 1/s

Min: 0 1/s Max: 60000 1/s
The compensation element is an additional integrator in the control deviation branch for
preventing contouring errors with prefeeders that have characteristics that change mono-
tonically or a feed rate of the continuous feeder that changes monotonically. It is used
for the
- overcoming the trigger threshold.
- reducing contouring errors with monotonically changing malfunctions.
The input and output of the compensation element are limited to 5 %.

Special case: P23.28 S: Compensation Element = 0: The Integrator is deleted.
P23.29 S: DO Open Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the 'open the prefeeder in the bin' command.
With systems with several VCU for the continuous scale:

The output should preferably be on the main VCU to prevent signal running times.
P23.30 S: DO Close Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the 'close the prefeeder in the bin' command.
With systems with several VCU for the continuous scale:

The output should preferably be on the main VCU to prevent signal running times.
P23.31 AI: Position Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
The definition of the input channel for the position return signal of the prefeeder.
Also refer to: P23.32 AI: Offset (B), P23.33 AI: Range (B)

Parameters
P23.32 AI: Offset (B) Default: 4 mA

The flow of the feedback signal for the 'closed' position of the prefeeder to the bin.
Also refer to: P23.31 AI: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.33 AI: Range (B)
P23.33 AI: Range (B) Default: 20 mA

The current of the feedback signal for the '100 %' signal of the prefeeder to the bin where
this position is supposed to correspond to a flow of bulk solids at the size of the nominal
flow rate of the continuous scale (P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate).
Also refer to: P23.31 AI: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.32 AI: Offset (B)
P23.34 AO: Position Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
The definition of the output for the position of the prefeeder in the bin as information to an
external control unit.
Also refer to: P23.35 AO: Offset (B), P23.36 AO: Range (B)
P23.35 AO: Offset (B) Default: 4 mA

Output current for the 'closed' position of the prefeeder in the bin.
Also refer to: P23.34 AO: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.36 AO: Range (B)
P23.36 AO: Range (B) Default: 20 mA

Output current for the prefeeder 100 % open position in the bin.
Also refer to: P23.34 AO: Position Flow Gate (B), P23.35 AO: Offset (B)

Parameters
P23.37 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) Default: W2

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the smallest open-
ing.
Possible causes:
- defect in the adjustment of the prefeeder control (control parameter P23.24 S: P-
Component - P23.28 S: Compensation Element)
- defect in the prefeeder's performance drive
- the prefeeder is leaky and bulk solids are flowing even when the prefeeder is closed
- the limit switch is incorrectly set
Actions:
- check the controller settings
- check the mechanical equipment of the prefeeder and limit switch
P23.38 Position MIN Flow Gate (B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder to the
bin. When the limit switch responds, no other 'close' signal is generated to protect the pre-
feeder's mechanical equipment. The event P23.37 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) is identified.
Note: The limit switch does not have any limiting impact on the controller. The controller
can go into saturation if the limit switch responds. This is why the limit position should be
clearly outside of the normal setting range.
P23.39 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) Default: W2

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the largest opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:

Parameters
P23.40 Position MAX Flow Gate(B) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder to the
bin. If the limit switch responds, no other 'open' signal is generated to protect the prefeed-
er's mechanical equipment. The event P23.39 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) is identified.
Note: The limit switch does not have any limiting impact on the controller. The controller
can go into saturation if the limit switch responds. This is why the limit position should be
clearly outside of the normal setting range.
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Second Bin Weigher

The system supports measuring two independant bin weights. The settings for the two bin weighers are
identical in most parameters, although continuous bin fill level regulation (P23.01 Bin Controller ON) can
only be operated with the first bin.
P24.01 Second Bin Weigher Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales.
It has the following functions:
1. displaying the bin weight
2. registering and monitoring threshold values
3. regulating the (min/max) level
4. the check scale for the check system
It can also be filled via menu.
YES: Second bin available

NO: No second bin available
P24.02 LC: Load Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LC
AI
FB
Definition of the measuring channel
If FB or AI are selected, the external value will be converted to a value with an mV/V di-
mension that corresponds to a measurement from a load cell. The following signal
processing for calculating weight in kg from the signal in mV/V is identical to all input types.
Also refer to:

P24.05 LC Characteristic Value
P24.06 LC Rated Capacity
If AI is selected, refer also to:


Parameters
P24.03 Bin Level analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

The input current for a load through bulk solids in the bin from zero.
Only relevant if P24.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI
P24.04 Bin Level analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The input current for a load through the bulk solids in the bin in accordance with the rated
load in P24.06 LC Rated Capacity.
Only relevant if P24.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI

Transfer factor of the load cell as per the data sheet. All load cells must have the same
rated values.
Also refer to: P24.06 LC Rated Capacity

Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The total of the rated capacities of the bin's load cells. All load cells must have the same
rated data.
Special case of a partially-weighed bin:

If a bin is only supported by load cells x % with a nominal load sum WZnenn1 and is other-
wise supported by non-weighing supports (fixed bearings), the nominal load cell load to be
entered is given by
P24.06 = WZnenn1 × 100 % / x %
If the percentage component x % on the load cells is not known a priori, the nominal load is
determined by the external weighing of one bin level.
Also refer to: P24.05 LC Characteristic Value

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Time constant of the load cell filter.
The load cell filter affects all measuring values dependant upon the measuring load.

Parameters
P24.08 Bipolar Measurement Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Switching the measuring range for the load cell amplifier.
NO: measurement can be made in one load direction only

YES: The load cell can measure both compression and tensile forces
As there is generally always an initial load on the load cell it is usually sufficient to analyze
the signal in the direction of compression only. The YES setting is needed in rare special
cases only, e.g. if a measuring eye is used to record weight.
Bipolar measurement reduces the resolution of the measuring signal.
P24.09 Event: Error LC Input Default: W1

Actions:
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched
on even after the error has been rectified.
P24.10 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: W1

The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of
the load cells.

Possible causes:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can significantly reduce the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P24.11 Nominal Bin Load Default: 100 % LC

Min: 0 % LC Max: 1000 % LC
The nominal bin level is the reference value for threshold values and analog outputs. It is
given as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P24.06 LC Rated Capacity).

Parameters
P24.12 Display Format Default: ---.--- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
------- g
-----.- g
----.-- g
Select the dimension and the decimal places for displays.
P24.13 Display Filter Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Time constant of the filter for displaying the weight value.
The filter applies to the display and analog or serial printout, but not to threshold values or
control contacts.
P24.14 Control Level MIN Default: 60 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
The MIN and MAX control levels can be used to control a filling unit (output P24.16 DO: Bin
Filling). If the fill level drops below MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again when it
reaches MAX.
Also refer to: P24.15 Control Level MAX
P24.15 Control Level MAX Default: 70 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using the MIN and MAX control levels (output P24.16 DO:
Bin Filling). If the fill level drops below MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again
when it reaches MAX.
Also refer to: P24.14 Control Level MIN

Parameters
P24.16 DO: Bin Filling Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output to start the filling procedure.
The output is set to 'do not fill' each time a scales alarm is triggered.
Also refer to: P24.14 Control Level MIN, P24.15 Control Level MAX
P24.17 Bin Level MIN Default: 5 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
MIN threshold for the bin level.
The output becomes active if the fill level underruns the lower threshold value. It operates
independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
Also refer to: P24.18 Event: Bin Level MIN, P24.19 DO: Bin Level MIN
P24.18 Event: Bin Level MIN Default: W1

Possible cause:
P24.19 DO: Bin Level MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output signal 'bin level too low'.
P24.20 Bin Level MAX Default: 120 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
MAX threshold value for the fill level.
Also refer to: P24.21 Event: Bin Level MAX, P24.22 DO: Bin Level MAX

Parameters
P24.21 Event: Bin Level MAX Default: W1

Possible cause:
P24.22 DO: Bin Level MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output in the event that the hopper fill level exceeds the upper threshold.
P24.23 AO: Bin Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the hopper fill level.
Also refer to: P24.24 AO: Offset, P24.25 AO: Range

Output current for a bin weight of 0 %.
Also refer to:

P24.23 AO: Bin Load
P24.11 Nominal Bin Load
P24.15 Control Level MAX

Output current for a fill weight of 100 %.
Also refer to: P24.23 AO: Bin Load, P24.24 AO: Offset

Parameters

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter is used to correct the measuring result. It is automatically set by the calibra-
tion program CB: Weight Check.
The measuring result is corrected using the factor in P24.26.
P24.27 Tare (Bin) Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The weight of the empty bin.
P24.28 Calibration Weight Default: 10 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The calibration weight for checking the weight measurement for use with the calibration
program for automatically calculating the correction in P24.26 Range Correction.
7.4.2.25
7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Check System
The check system controls and corrects a continuous scales using the change in bin weight; the changes in
weight result only from the bulk material passing over continuous scales. During measurement all other in-
and outflows must be stopped.
A signals flow chart for control can be found in the appendix.

Parameters
P25.01 Type of Check System Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Single Unit
Filling System
Extern
Selects the control concept
NO:
No check system
Single unit:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin form a mechanical unit and are
weighed together. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Separated Units:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin are decoupled both mechanically and
with regards to weighing. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Filling system:
The continuous weighfeeder fills the control bin during the check.
External:
The control procedure is controlled by a higher-order system. The DISOCONT Tersus only
supplies the relevant measured values.
The following parameters only are effective:
- P25.23 DO: Check Measurement Active
- P25.26 Absolute Range
- P25.27 Relative Range
The following parameter description relates primarily to the single unit and separated units
types.
The appendix has a flow chart.
P25.02 Check System Influence Default: Bin

Alternative: Bin
Second Bin
Bin + Second Bin
Decision which bin weight is used for calculating the reduction in weight for comparing with
continuous flow rate recording.
Bin: The weight of the first bin weigher is used.

Refer to: P22.01 Bin Weigher Active to P22.31 Bin Level analog Input Range
Second Bin: The weight of the second bin weigher is used.

Refer to: P24.01 Second Bin Weigher Active to P24.28 Calibration Weight
Bin + Second Bin: The total of the weight of both bins is used

Parameters
P25.03 Auto Correction Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Setting for the correction unit once measurement is finished.
NO: Correction must be started manually

YES: Correction is performed automatically if the correction result lies within the set thre-
sholds (P25.26 Absolute Range, P25.27 Relative Range).
P25.04 Cyclic Auto Start Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Tare
Span
Automatic start of the check system.
NO:
No automatic start
Tare:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting tare or additive effects of errors.
Span:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting the proportionality factor between the meas-
ured value and actual flow rate. Correction of multiplicatively acting effects of errors.
It starts after a pause preselected with the parameters P25.05 Cycle Time. It also makes
sense to preselect automatic correction (P25.03 Auto Correction = YES).
P25.05 Cycle Time Default: 0.5 h

Min: 0 h Max: 100 h
With automatic start selected, the standby time between the end of one check and the start
of the next.
Also refer to: P25.04 Cyclic Auto Start
P25.06 Release Check System Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
Defines the input that will activate a check by the system controller.
If no active signal given:

1. no check will be started
2. a running check will be canceled.
The setting 'n/a' makes the check system continuously active.

Parameters
P25.07 Event: No Check Release Default: W2

Event Group: CH Number: 09
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized
one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing
authorization.
P25.08 Check Start Span Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a
range correction.
P25.09 Check Start Tare Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a
tare correction.
P25.10 Accept Correction Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determine the signal source for correction of the continuous scales on the basis of the out-
come of the check system.
Once measurement has ended the check system moves to the acknowledgement phase
and waits for the correcting command, when P25.03 Auto Correction = NO. Corrections can
also by made manually if the tolerances P25.26 Absolute Range or P25.27 Relative Range
have been exceeded. Correction is triggered by the input flank.

Parameters
P25.11 Finish Check Measurement Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determines the source of the signal for canceling a running check. The command acts in all
phases of measurement. The calibration of the continuous scale is not changed by the
cancellation. The input is flank-controlled.
The check must be canceled if the measuring system is in acknowledgement phase and if
the control outcome is not to be used to correct the continuous scales.
P25.12 Check Quantity Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The quantity of bulk solids that should be discharged as a check.
The quantity selected should be large enough to minimize the effects of errors when deter-
mining the control quantity. By the same token the hopper should have sufficient capacity
for the control quantity.
P25.13 Storage Quantity Default: 500 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level for the start of a check. If needed,
material will be filled to this level before measurement begins.
Preconditions:
1. The storage quantity must be smaller than the max. control fill level: P25.13 < P25.16
Maximum Fill Weight.
If this condition is not met, the check will end after starting with the message CH 03 (max.
check fill level).
P25.14 Minimum Fill Weight Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Bulk material buffer that must remain in the hopper during a check so that the flow charac-
teristics and the material density at the feeding point do not change significantly.
The measurement would cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level) if the ma-
terial quantity falls below this amount.

Parameters
P25.15 Event: Minimum Fill Weight Default: W1

The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P25.14 Minimum Fill Weight during a
check. The control measurement is finished early.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density greater than specified
- unfavorable adjustment of P25.12 Check Quantity or P25.14 Minimum Fill Weight or
P25.13 Storage Quantity
P25.16 Maximum Fill Weight Default: 1000 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The maximum check fill weight is the greatest fill level allowed during a check. The measur-
ing period will not begin until the fill level falls below this value.
The permissible operating range of the control measurement within the bin fill level is de-
termined by the two threshold values Min P25.14 Minimum Fill Weight and Max P25.16
Maximum Fill Weight.
P25.17 Event: Maximum Fill Weight Default: W1

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is fi-
nished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P25.13 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill
level (P25.16 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts. In case
of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
P25.18 Damping Time Default: 3 s

The waiting period from switching off filling to starting the control measurement. The
process variables should stabilize within this period. This time is also observed even if the
bin was not filled shortly beforehand.
P25.19 DO: Control Started Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message 'control active'.
The signal is active from the start of the control until successful correction or cancellation.

Parameters
P25.20 Feeder Stopped Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
The 'On/Off' feedback from the filling element. The settling time (P25.18 Damping Time)
starts with the Off signal when the check has started. The check will wait for the feedback
signal (the P25.21 Event: Feeder Not Stopped event) before starting the settling time if
filling is switched on.
The check will be canceled without a response if the conveying element On feedback is
received after starting settling time.
P25.21 Event: Feeder Not Stopped Default: W1

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
P25.22 Event: Prepare Check Measurement Default: W2

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than
the maximum check fill level (P25.16 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
P25.23 DO: Check Measurement Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message that the check system is in the measuring
phase.

Parameters
P25.24 Event: Expect Acceptance Default: W2

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded
(P25.03 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction
P25.25 DO:Expect Acceptance Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the information that the check system is waiting for
the operator's decision at the end.
The output is independent of the event class.
Also refer to: P25.24 Event: Expect Acceptance
P25.26 Absolute Range Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the sum of all previous corrections.
Correction will not be made automatically if the threshold would be exceeded by a check.
An event will be identified in each case.
See also:
P25.28 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
P25.30 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
P25.27 Relative Range Default: 3 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the currently pending correction.
Correction will not be made automatically if the error overshoots the threshold. An event will
be identified in each case.
See also:
P25.29 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error
P25.31 Event: Relative Span Correction Error

Parameters
P25.28 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the
threshold value P25.26 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration. There is no
automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result
manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction
weighting factor P25.32 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analy-
sis.
Cause of the event:

- substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station)
- defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects)
Actions:
- checking the weighing station of the feeder scale
- taring the feeder scale
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)
P25.29 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error Default: W1

The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value P25.27
Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic correction. The
operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. It is monitored and
reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P25.32 Correction
Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)

Parameters
P25.30 Event: Absolute Span Correction Default: W1

Error
The threshold in P25.26 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for
multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.01 Range Correction
P25.31 Event: Relative Span Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P25.27 Relative
Range.
Brel = (1 - B )× 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
P25.32 Correction Evaluation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
The extent of the correction is determined by the factor P25.32 Correction Evaluation.
There is no correction with P25.32 = 0 and the complete defect ascertained is corrected
with P25.32 = 1.
P25.32 = 1 is normally set for the first control measurement to make a basic setting. Sub-
sequent corrections, in particular when checks are automatically started, are normally car-
ried out with P25.32 < 1. This makes it possible to filter the control results and eliminate
random measuring errors in the control measurement.
P25.33 Correction Speed Default: 0 s

To ensure that the correction does not bring about any flow rate jumps, it can be automati-
cally carried out in small steps. If 0 is entered, it is corrected
in one step. P25.33 defines the time between two steps of 0.1 % of the nominal load (at
tare correction) or 0.1 % of P10.01 Range Correction (with range correction).

Parameters
P25.34 AO: Check Measurement Result Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the analog output channel for the result of the control (loss in bin weight) / (ad-
vancement in continuous scales counter). Updating is made at the start of an acknowled-
gement phase. The output value is retained until the next acknowledgement phase. The
correction quantification in P25.32 Correction Evaluation is disregarded at output.
Signal scaling is linear between 4 ... 20 mA = 0.9 ... 1.1.

Examples:
4 mA = 0.9
12 mA = 1
20 mA = 1.1
P25.35 DO: Check Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P25.01 Type of
Check System = Filling System).
Procedure: the control gate will divert the material either through the normal conveyance
path or into the control bin. The correct position of the control gate can be monitored by the
digital input 'Echo Control Gate' (P25.36 Check Gate Feedback).
P25.36 Check Gate Feedback Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter only relates to the check by weight increase in the bin (P25.01 Type of
Check System = filling system).
Defines the input channel for the position return signal from the control gate. The return
signal is not monitored with the setting 'n/a'.
If there is no feedback from the control gate within the monitoring time (P25.37 Check Gate
Time), the 'control gate error' event is set and the KME is canceled.
Also refer to: P25.35 DO: Check Gate, P25.38 Event: Check Gate Error

Parameters
P25.37 Check Gate Time Default: 0 s

Tolerated time allowed for the control gate to move between command and position return
signal.
Also refer to:

P25.35 DO: Check Gate
P25.36 Check Gate Feedback
P25.38 Event: Check Gate Error
P25.38 Event: Check Gate Error Default: W1

The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P25.37 Check Gate Time
P25.39 Limit Max. Bin Error Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 10000 %
The bin fill level is measured at the start and the end of the measuring phase. Both measur-
ing points are monitored for disturbances in the measurement.
If the malfunctions exceed the threshold value in P25.39, another attempt at measuring will
be started after a time defined by P25.18 Damping Time. However, if this attempt also re-
turns excessively high malfunctions, the check will be canceled, the results discarded and
an event identified (P25.40 Event: Bin Error). Disturbances are not monitored if the setting
is 0 %.
How to set:
1. set the threshold to 10,000 %
2. Monitor the service display 'KME Window' during the check procedure
and note the max. value.
3. key in approximately 3 times this value in parameter P25.39 Limit Max. Bin Error.

Parameters
P25.40 Event: Bin Error Default: W1

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check.
The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has
been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P25.39 Limit Max. Bin Error
P25.41 DO: Correction Error Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for displaying an error condition of the control measurement.
The output is set if one of the events CH 04 - CH 07 occurs (measuring result lies outside
tolerance levels). The check is finished, although the correction has not been carried out.
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Tube Control

The check bin can be designed to be pipe-shaped and be constantly filled with bulk solids in operation with-
out a check measurement. Generally, this type of bin is used for feeding fuel.
Special conditions have to be maintained to guarantee the safety and reliability of the plant. The appendix
has a logic diagram of the control unit needed.
P26.01 DI: CO-Alarm Hopper Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for connecting a CO controller in the bin or conveyor line.
Higher CO values indicate smolder spots that require safety functions.
Also refer to: the logic link in the appendix.

Parameters
P26.02 Event: CO-Alarm Hopper Default: A

The event is identified when the CO sensor has noted higher values.
Warning: There is the danger of explosion and fire
Possible causes:
Smolder spots or bulk solids burning en route
Actions:
Explosion and fire protection as per the plant's protection strategy
P26.03 DO: Check Valve Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel controlled to the drive of the material shut-off valve on
the bin input. The valve has to be triggered through this output to guarantee the safety func-
tions.
Caution: For safety purposes, the standard output should not be used for filling control
P22.14 DO: Bin Filling in pulverized coal applications.
P26.04 Check Valve Feedback Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The 'OPEN' feedback of the KME valve controlled by P26.03 DO: Check Valve is read in
through this digital input and used for controling bin aeration.
P26.05 DO: Hopper Aeration Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This digital output can be used to open the valve to blow compressed air into the room
above the bulk solids if it falls below the MIN limit fill level (P22.15 Bin Level MIN).
P26.06 DO Pressure Compen. Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This digital output is used to open the pressure equalization line from the conveyor line into
the space above the bulk solids in the check bin during the check.

Parameters
P26.07 DO Check Gate Opened Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the valve opened signal for use in the external con-
trol unit. The signal becomes active when the input P26.04 Check Valve Feedback is ac-
tive.
P26.08 DO Check Gate Closed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the 'valve is closed' signal for use in the external
control unit. The signal becomes active when the input P26.04 Check Valve Feedback is
not active.
P26.09 Min. KME Feedrate Default: 5 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
The lower threshold value of the flow rate with a check measurement (KME). If the current
flow rate drops below the threshold value, any check measurement is interrupted or cannot
be started. In addition, an event is identified.
This function serves to protect the shut-off valve on the bin input that is subject to greater
wear and tear when moving into a stationary column of bulk solids .
Also refer to: P26.10 Event: Min KME Setpoint
P26.10 Event: Min KME Setpoint Default: W1

It dropped below the lower threshold value of the flow rate during a check measurement
(KME). The check was canceled.
This report only acts as a indication of the reason for cancelling the check. This check
should be repeated if the flow rate is sufficiently high.
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Moisture

For certain processes, other units than units of weight per time may be more relevant to the feeding
process. One example is bulk material moisture. The relevant parameter is not the weight of the moist ma-
terial but rather the weight of the dry material.
The measuring system can correct bulk solid properties such as these. This requires that the disturbance
variable, e.g. the moisture or ash content, be measured and the result sent to the system. The measuring
system then calculates the bulk solid components relevant to the process and feeds it instead of the total
weight.

Parameters
P27.01 Moisture Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The actual flow rate can be corrected with the moisture block. The corrected value will al-
ways be used for the controller input and the batch counter if moisture correction is active.
The pulses for an external counter can be issued configured with P27.14 Pulse Counter
corrected, corrected or not corrected.
NO: No correction
YES: Weight signal is corrected
The parameters relevant to moisture correction are visible only when correction is active.
P27.02 Moisture Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With factory default value "n/a" , the correction is not active.
P27.03 AI: Moisture Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture con-
tent.
Also refer to:

P27.04 Nominal Moisture
P27.05 Moisture Offset
P27.06 Moisture Range
P27.04 Nominal Moisture Default: 20 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight.
Also refer to:

P27.03 AI: Moisture Measurement
P27.05 Moisture Offset
P27.06 Moisture Range

Parameters
P27.05 Moisture Offset Default: 4 mA

Current for a correction value of 0%
Reference value: P27.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P27.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P27.06 Moisture Range
P27.06 Moisture Range Default: 20 mA

Current for a correction value of 100%
Reference value: P27.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P27.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P27.05 Moisture Offset
P27.07 DO: Moisture active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the output channel for signal 'Correction active'.
Also refer to: P27.02 Moisture Select
P27.08 Moisture MAX Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P27.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P27.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P27.09 DO: Moisture MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has ex-
ceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P27.08 Moisture MAX, P27.10 Event: Moisture MAX

Parameters
P27.10 Event: Moisture MAX Default: W1

The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been ex-
ceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P27.08 Moisture MAX, P27.09 DO: Moisture MAX
P27.11 AO: Flow Rate corrected Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P27.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P27.13 AO: Flow Rate Range
P27.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for an output of 0 %.
P27.13 AO: Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for an output of 100 %.
P27.14 Pulse Counter corrected Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter.
NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity

YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction
factor, e.g. moisture.

Parameters
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Additional device
P28.01 Auto Zero Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Preselection of the automatic zeroing system that corrects the zero point when the pre-
feeder is switched off and the measuring wheel is running. The automatic mechanism regu-
larly ascertains the current zero point and enters it into the parameter P10.03 Tare Correc-
tion.
Preselection of the automatic zeroing system that corrects the zero point in operation with-
out flowing bulk solids.
Conditions:
- the measuring wheel is running and the prefeeder is switched off
- no set-up program active
- no parameter input active
P28.02 Auto Zero Limit Default: 2 % Io

Higher threshold value for the zeroing system in percent of P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate.
At the end of automatic zero setting, it checks to see whether the amount of the deviation is
smaller than P28.02 to the last valid zero setting. If the value is outside of the tolerance
limit, the results are discarded; otherwise, it checks the absolute zeroing limit (P10.04 Ze-
roing Limit). The zeroing results only become effective when both conditions are met.
Otherwise, an event P28.03 Event: Tare Correction is identified.
P28.03 Event: Tare Correction Default: W1

The tare value calculated by the automatic zeroing system is in excess of

P28.02 Auto Zero Limit or P10.04 Zeroing Limit.
The value is not accepted.
Possible cause:
- changed air characteristics on the route
- shunt forces between the rotor and walls
Actions:
- check the force measurement
- check for friction between the measuring wheel and housing
- check flexible seals
- check the air currents

Parameters
P28.04 Zero Drop-Out Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The zero drop out function sets the display of the flow rate to zero when the load drops
below the threshold value in P28.04 Zero Drop-Out Active. This prevents the totalizing
counter from running on if measuring continues for a longer period while no bulk material
flows. This suppresses small, unavoidable tare errors.
YES: activate the Zero Drop Out system.

NO: Zero Drop Out has no effect. The small operating range is displayed at the measured
value.
P28.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit Default: 1 % Io

Recording the total is suppressed with measurements within this limit around the zero point
to ensure that the counter remains constant when the belt is idle.
No feature appears on the display.
The reference: Nominal Flow Rate (service value)
P28.06 DO: Agitator ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for switching on the loosening mechanism (agitator) in
a bin from which the bulk solids are drawn off for the feed unit.
Also refer to: P28.07 START Agitator
P28.07 START Agitator Default: 0 % Io

Threshold value at which the agitator is switched on. The agitator is switched on by P28.06
DO: Agitator ON 30 seconds after the setpoint has exceeded the threshold for a feeder in
an on-state. The agitator switches off with no delay when the feeder is switched off.
Reference: Flow Rate Units
P28.08 DO: Ventilation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output that activated the bulk solids in the bin after a longer standstill
by blowing in gas.
When starting the plant or after the end of KME, the contact is alternately set (P28.10 Ven-
tilation Pulse) and deleted (P28.11 Ventilation Pause) for the aeration nozzle with the
command for aeration time (P28.09 Ventilation Time). If P28.11 = 0 s, the contact has been
set for the entire aeration time. Output is reset when switching off the scale.

Parameters
P28.09 Ventilation Time Default: 60 s

Min: 1 s Max: 600 s
The duration of bin aeration.
Also refer to: P28.08 DO: Ventilation
P28.10 Ventilation Pulse Default: 1 s

Min: 1 s Max: 10 s
The duration of an aeration impulse.
P28.11 Ventilation Pause Default: 5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60 s
The duration between two aeration impulses.
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - Pressure Compensation

Pressure compensation has the function of compensating the vertical forces resulting from pressures on the
bin in the weight signal. The pressure is measured, the resulting force acting on the surface area affected by
the applied pressure calculated and the bin weight value corrected additively.
Pressure compensation does not work for the second bin weigher.
P29.01 Compensation Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates pressure compensation.
If compensation is not activated, the associated parameters will not be displayed in Easy-
Serve.

Parameters
P29.02 Compensation Source Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
LC
The definition of the input channel for the pressure signal.
Also refer to:

P29.03 Pressure Characteristic Value
P29.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
Also refer to the following when adjusting P29.02 = AI:

P29.18 Compensation analog Input Offset
P29.19 Compensation analog Input Range
P29.03 Pressure Characteristic Value Default: 2.85 mV/V

Nominal sensitivity of the pressure sensors (nameplate).
P29.04 Pressure Rated Cap. Default: 1 Bar

Min: 0.001 Bar Max: 2000 Bar
Nominal capacity of the pressure sensors (nameplate).
P29.05 Filter Pressure Value DMS Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The filter for the input signal if P29.02 Compensation Source = LC was adjusted.
P29.06 Event: DMS-Input Default: A

The event is identified if there is a substantial defect in the signal of the pressure sensor
and the pressure signal is read in through the VME interface.
Possible causes:
- defective sensor cable
- sensor improperly connected

Parameters
P29.07 Event: DMS-Input > MAX Default: A

This event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is over its
nominal value.
Possible causes:
- overload on the pressure sensor
- defective sensor
P29.08 Event: DMS-Input < MIN Default: W1

The event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is substan-
tially below zero.
Possible causes:
- unexpected pressure conditions
- defective sensor
P29.09 Zero Default: 0.2 Bar

Min: -100 Bar Max: 1000 Bar
The compensation of a potential offset of the pressure sensor
Setting:
P29.09 = 0
Read off the service value of the pressure with atmospheric pressure on the sensor
Adjust the value read in P29.09
Finally, the service display should display the value '0' for pressure.
P29.10 Norming Default: 4580 kg/Bar

Min: 0 kg/Bar Max: 220000000 kg/Bar
Adjusting the proportionality factor between pressure and the force resulting from pressure
on the load cells of the bin.
Setting:
- initially adjust P29.09
- note the weight m0 of the bin at the pressure = '0'
- impinge the bin with any (although constant) pressure
- read the service value of the pressure (p1)
- note the weight m1 of the bin
- adjust P29.10 = (m1 - m0) / p1
The bin weight shown should now always be m0 regardless of the pressure.

Parameters
P29.11 Pressure-MIN Default: 40 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
The minimum threshold value for pressure monitoring.
Reference value: P29.04
P29.12 Event: Pressure-MIN Default: IG

The pressure in the bin has fallen below the lower threshold.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor
P29.13 DO: Pressure-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the measured pressure value is below the threshold value
in P29.11 Pressure-MIN.
The output functions independant of the selection of event class in P29.12 Event: Pressure-
MIN.
P29.14 Pressure-MAX Default: 45 %

Min: -100 % Max: 200 %
The maximum threshold value for pressure monitoring.
Reference value: P29.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
P29.15 Event: Pressure-MAX Default: W2

The pressure in the bin has exceeded the upper threshold value.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor

Parameters
P29.16 DO: Pressure-MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the measured pressure value is above the threshold val-
ue in P29.14 Pressure-MAX.
The output functions independant of the selection of event class in P29.15 Event: Pressure-
MAX.
P29.17 DI: Switch On Compensation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for activating pressure compensation.
Compensation is always active with P29.17 DI: Switch On Compensation = n/a .
P29.18 Compensation analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

The input flow for pressure zero.
Only relevant if P29.02 Compensation Source = AI
P29.19 Compensation analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The input flow for nominal pressure adjusted in P29.04 Pressure Rated Cap..
Only relevant if P29.02 Compensation Source = AI
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - Dead Time

The system allows the switch-on command and setpoints to be delayed. This is a useful function if several
consecutive feeders operate as a collective system and the batch must be correct at all times. The first
feeder receives the control commands instantaneously, the following feeder receives them after a delay
corresponding to the transit time of the bulk material from the first feeder to the collection point (= dead
time).

Parameters
P30.01 Dead Time Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Setpoint + ON/OFF
Setpoint
ON/OFF
There is a dead time element for the setpoint and ON/OFF command each, each of which
can be activated separately.
NO: no dead-time active

Setpoint: dead-time active for the setpoint only
ON/OFF: dead-time for ON/OFF only active
Setpoint + ON/OF: dead-time for setpoint and ON/OFF active
P30.02 Dead Time Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
The value for dead time is valid for start/stop commands and setpoint changes.
P30.03 Setpoint Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Activates the setpoint delay. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with no delay.
P30.04 Setpoint Clock ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay
should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P30.05 ON/OFF Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Activates the delay for start/stop commands. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with
no delay.

Parameters
P30.06 ON/OFF Clock ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay
should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P30.07 Time Elements Preassign Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With this command the timing elements are preallocated with the current setpoint or
the current ON/OFF command.
P30.08 Initialise Time Elements Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The setpoint element is preallocated with ZERO at initialization and the ON/OFF element is
preallocated with OFF.
P30.09 DO: Dead Time Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint or active dead-time ON/OFF.
P30.10 DO: Setpoint Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint.
P30.11 DO: ON/OFF Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output active dead-time ON/OFF.
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Process Temperature

The temperature in the area of the meter can be recorded. Higher temperatures can cause damage to the
meter. Cooling equipment can be activated at excess temperatures.
The temperature can be read in through an analog input or a Bluetooth link on the rotating part.

Parameters
P31.01 Temperature Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activating temperature measurement.
P31.02 Temperature Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
The definition of the input channel for the temperature signal.
AI: Using an analog signal. The signal is adapted over P31.03 Temperature Norming MIN
through P31.06 Temperature Norming Range.
n/a: The signal is read in through Bluetooth. which means that the communication has to be
activated through P05.04 LC: Load Measurement and configured through P05.09 Loading
cell BT ID1 and P05.10 Loading cell BT ID2.
P31.03 Temperature Norming MIN Default: 0 °C

Min: -280 °C Max: 300 °C
The temperature for the input flow set in P31.05 Temperature Norming Offset.
Only relevant if P31.02 Temperature Measurement = AI.
P31.04 Temperature Norming MAX Default: 100 °C

Min: -280 °C Max: 1000 °C
The temperature for the input flow set in P31.06 Temperature Norming Range.
P31.05 Temperature Norming Offset Default: 4 mA

The input flow for the temperature set in P31.03 Temperature Norming MIN.
P31.06 Temperature Norming Range Default: 20 mA

The input flow for the temperature set in P31.04 Temperature Norming MAX.

Parameters
P31.07 Temperature MAX Default: 80 °C

Min: 50 °C Max: 90 °C
The upper threshold value for the temperature. An event P31.08 Event: Temperature-MAX
is identified if the current temperature exceeds the threshold value.
P31.08 Event: Temperature-MAX Default: A

The event is identified when the temperature in the meter exceeds the upper threshold
value. There is the danger of damage to the meter.
Possible cause:
- higher bulk solid temperature
- a lack of cooling
Potential actions:
- checking the bulk solids
- checking cooling
P31.09 Temperature Cooling Default: 70 °C

Min: 20 °C Max: 90 °C
The threshold value for using cooling. Cooling is switched on P31.10 DO: Cooling at tem-
peratures above the threshold value.
Also refer to: P31.11 Temperature Hysteresis
P31.10 DO: Cooling Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for switching on cooling for the meter. The output be-
comes active when the temperature exceeds the threshold value in P31.09 Temperature
Cooling.
Generally, it is cooled by blowing cool air into the inside of the meter.
P31.11 Temperature Hysteresis Default: 3 °C

Min: 0 °C Max: 90 °C
Hysteresis for switching on cooling. Cooling is switched off when the temperature falls be-
low the value of P31.09 - P31.11.
Also refer to: P31.10 DO: Cooling

Parameters
P31.12 Pressure Cooling OK Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for monitoring the pressure in the cooling system. An
event P31.13 Event: Press. Cooling is identified with low pressure.
Also refer to: P31.09 Temperature Cooling - P31.11 Temperature Hysteresis
P31.13 Event: Press. Cooling Default: A

The event is identified when the pressure in the cooling system is too low. There is the
danger that the meter becomes too warm and suffers damage.
Potential causes:
- a loss of the compressed air supply
- the filter is blocked
Actions:
- check the cooling plant
- cleaning the filter
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Safety Functions

The parameters in this group define special monitoring events when feeding dangerous bulk materials. The-
se functions must be activated if feeding pulverized coal.
P32.01 Safety activation: Option code Default: n/a
Activation and de-activation of the extended safety functions via code.
The safety functions reduce the range of allowed values of some parameters. They are
activated in case of the risk of serious danger resulting from a wrong parameter setting.
Typical use: Dosing of fuel. Details for the limitations are found in the appendix chapter
"Safety Function for Feeding Hazardous Materials".
The safety functions can only be activated and de-activated via codes specific for the de-
vice. These codes can only be generated by Schenck Process.
When the correct activation code is entered, the parameter shows "SAFETY SET:Enabled",
when disabled with the correct code it shows "SAFETY SET:Disabled". The setting remains
on loading of defaults and on loading of the application software. Units with activated safety
functions are of type VCU20100-S with a specific material number.

Parameters
P32.02 DI: Purge Air Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The digital input for monitoring the purge air for the bearing of the measuring wheel. The
purge air is monitored in all operational states. If it is missing, a running measuring wheel is
switched off and an event is identified. Monitoring is deactivated in the alternative P32.02 =
n/a.
Also refer to:

P32.03 DO: Purge Air
P32.04 Event: No Purge Air
P32.03 DO: Purge Air Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel in the event that purge air is missing for the bearing of
the measuring wheel.
The output functions independant of the event class set in P32.04 Event: No Purge Air.
Also refer to: P32.02 DI: Purge Air
P32.04 Event: No Purge Air Default: A

The event is identified when purge air is missing for the bearing of the measuring wheel. A
lack of purge air on the running measuring wheel causes damage in the bearing.
Possible causes:
- a lack of compressed air
- soiled filter
Steps to be taken;
check the compressed air for bearings
P32.05 DI: Conveying Air Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the "conveying air monitoring" signal. Conveying air is
used for transporting the bulk solids through the prefeeder (MULTCELL) and meter
(MULTICOR). An event P32.06 Event: No Conveying Air is identified if conveying air is
missing. Monitoring is deactivated with P32.05 DI: Conveying Air = n/a.

Parameters
P32.06 Event: No Conveying Air Default: A

The event is identified when there is a lack of conveying air. There is the danger of clogging
in the route. Furthermore, it is possible that the system cannot convey the nominal flow
rate.
Possible causes:
- compressed air is missing
Actions:
check the compressed air
P32.07 Source Emergency Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
If the emergency setpoint is activated, setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint
(P32.08 Emergency Setpoint) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P32.08 Emergency Setpoint Default: 6000 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
If the emergency setpoint is activated (input P32.07 Source Emergency Setpoint), setpoints
greater than the emergency setpoint (P32.08) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.06 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P32.09 Setpoint Step + Default: 300 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 300 % Io
Max increase of the setpoint in one step if entered by keyboard.
P32.10 Setpoint Step - Default: 300 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 300 % Io
Max reduction of the setpoint in one step if entered by keyboard.
P32.11 Setpoint Factor Default: 1.5

Min: 1 Max: 100
Increase of the setpoint step by the factor entered with the scales switched off.

Parameters
P32.12 If OFF: Reset Setpoint Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines how the setpoint behaves when the scales are switched off.
YES: the keyboard setpoint is set to zero when the scales are switched off.
P32.13 Feeder Check FC Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The controller magnitude can be monitored in relation to the flow rate setpoint. Major devia-
tions indicate a malfunction in the external part of the flow rate control circuit. When the
controller magnitude is too large in relation to the flow rate setpoint, that indicates that vo-
lumetric feeding is idling. Some reasons for this can be a clogged conveying element, a
blockade in the feed bin or an empty feed bin. After breaking down the blockade, the flow
rate might increase since the controller magnitude is very large.
On the other hand, if the flow rate is too small in relation to the flow rate setpoint, this indi-
cates that either bulk solids are flowing without control through the conveying element (-->
bulk solids is shooting) or there is a defect in measuring the material flow.
Monitoring is activated with this parameter and stopped through P32.14 FC: Tolerance at
100% - P32.20 DO: FC-MIN Limit. You can find the details of its function in the appendix.
P32.14 FC: Tolerance at 100% Default: 40 %

Min: 0 % Max: 300 %
A permissible deviation in the speed or controller magnitude at a flow rate setpoint of
100 %.
The reference is the nominal speed (P05.03 Nominal Speed) or the nominal value of the
controller magnitude (P11.08 Bypass).
Also refer to:

P32.13 Feeder Check FC
P32.15 FC: Tolerance at 50%

Min: 0 % Max: 300 %
A permissible deviation in the speed or controller magnitude at a flow rate setpoint of 50 %.
Also refer to:


Parameters

Min: 0 % Max: 300 %
A permissible deviation in the speed or controller magnitude at a flow rate setpoint of 0 %.
Also refer to:

P32.17 Event: FC-MIN Limit Default: W1

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is smaller than the
threshold.
Possible reasons:
- bulk material is shooting through the discharge unit
P32.18 Event: FC-MAX Limit Default: A

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is larger than the
threshold.
Possible reasons:
- the feed hopper is empty
P32.19 DO: FC-MAX Limit Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output used if the ratio between actuating variable and feed rate setpoint is larger than the
threshold value. The output is independent of the class of the associated event.
Also refer to: P32.18 Event: FC-MAX Limit

Parameters
P32.20 DO: FC-MIN Limit Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output in the event that the ratio of the feeder's controller magnitude/flow rate setpoint is
smaller than the threshold value. The output is independent of the class of the associated
event.
Also refer to: P32.17 Event: FC-MIN Limit
P32.21 Start Delay Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
If it is used in an environment with hot bulk solids or explosive dust, the inside of the
equipment has to be kept cool in operation. This is why cooling air is blown into the meter.
Feeding may only be switched on if sufficient cooling is ensured.
When turn-on delay is activated, the blower is initially switched on through the appropriate
output (P32.26 DO Blower) when turning it on. The pressure in the cooling system is moni-
tored (P32.23 Pressure Blower OK). The measuring wheel and then feeding is switched on
20 s after the feedback on sufficient pressure.
Cooling blower control and monitoring are activated via parameters.
P32.23 Pressure Blower OK Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the output with the signal for monitoring the pressure in the cooling sys-
tem.
Also refer to: P32.21 Start Delay
P32.24 Event: Pressure Blower Default: A

The pressure in the cooling system is too low. This means that the meter can overheat,
which might have the effect of igniting an explosive atmosphere.
Possible causes:
- loss of the cooling blower
- soiled filters in the cooling system
Actions:
- checking the cooling blower

Parameters
P32.26 DO Blower Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output for switching on the cooling blower.
Also refer to: P32.21 Start Delay
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Interlocking

The parameters of this group configure the system's predefined events and running messages.
Also refer to the interlocking logic circuit diagram in the appendices
P33.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Parameters
P33.06 DI: Event Electricity 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
P33.09 DO: Event Mechanics Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P33.10 Event: Mechanics Default: W1

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P33.11 DO: Event Electricity Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P33.12 Event: Electricity Default: W1


Parameters
P33.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P33.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P33.15 Event: Mechatronics Default: W1

P33.16 DO: Ready Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P33.17 Event: Not Ready Default: W1

P33.18 DO: Ready for Start Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P33.19 Event: Not Ready for Start Default: W1


Parameters
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - FCB analog outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical analog outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P34.01 FCB_AO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P34.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 Default: 4 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 0.
P34.03 Range FCB_AO 1 Default: 20 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 100%
Reference value: P34.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
See also: P34.01 FCB_AO 01
P34.04 Reference FCB_AO 1 Default: 1000

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output.
Also refer to: P34.01 FCB_AO 01, P34.03 Range FCB_AO 1

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01
P34.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P34.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P34.04 Reference FCB_AO 1

Parameters

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Parameters

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P34.01 FCB_AO 01
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - FCB digital outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical binary outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P35.01 FCB_DO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - Data Logging

The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
P36.01 Hourly Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 59 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a full
hour.
P36.02 Daily Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 1439 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a day.
P36.03 Logger cycle time Default: 1 min

Min: 1 min Max: 1439 min
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P36.04 ... P36.13.

Parameters
P36.04 Data Log Value 1 Default: 752
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in
the 'data communication' manual.
Also refer to:

P36.03 Logger cycle time
These manuals:
Similar to P36.04 Data Log Value 1

Parameters
7.4.2.37 Parameter Block 37 - Configuration HMI Values

The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the oper-
ating panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus.
On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation
map in the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data com-
munication:
P37.01 HMI Value 01 Default: 1872
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.

Parameters

Parameters
7.4.2.38 Parameter Block 38 - Linearization
P38.01 Linearization ON Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Load measuring can be linearized with this parameters.
The 4 linearization points can be determined by calibration with calibration weights or using
material. Not required or not measured points must be laid either outside the measuring
range or must be interpolated.
Consider the location of the linearization in the signal processing (--> appendix).
Detailed calibration instructions are in the appendix.
P38.02 Linearization S1 Default: 25 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Linearization point 1:
The correct flow rate, for instance ascertained with a material inspection.
P38.03 Linearization I1 Default: 25 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Linearization point 1:
The flow rate measured by MULTICOR.

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Linearization point 2.
Otherwise as P38.02 Linearization S1

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
Refer to P38.03 Linearization I1 for a description

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io

Parameters

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io

Min: 0.1 % Io Max: 1000 % Io
P38.10 Event: Linearization Error Default: W2

Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered
7.4.2.39 Parameter Block 39 - Flow Gate

The parameters of this group are only relevant if the prefeeder is designed as a position-regulated feed gate
(P11.01 Controller Type) for the bulk solids to the feeder scale.
P39.01 S: DO Open Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Only relevant if P11.01 = "Stepping".
The definition of the output channel for opening the position-controlled prefeeder. With
DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).

Parameters
P39.02 S: DO Close Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Only relevant if P11.01 = "Stepping".
The definition of the output channel for closing the position-controlled prefeeder. With
DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P39.03 AI: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
The definition of the input channel for the feedback signal for the position of the prefeeder.
Also refer to:

P39.04 AI: Offset
P39.05 AI: Range
P39.04 AI: Offset Default: 4 mA

The input current at the 'just closed' position of the feed gate.
P39.05 AI: Range Default: 20 mA

The input current for the nominal position is 100 %. There should be a material flow of 100
% of the nominal operating range P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate at the nominal position under
nominal conditions for the bulk solids.
P39.06 AO: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
The definition of the analog output channel with the information on the position of the pre-
feeder to external equipment. Norming via P39.07 AO: Offset and P39.08 AO: Range

The output current for the 0 % prefeeder position is opened ('just closed').

The output current for the 100 % prefeeder position is opened ('just completely closed').

Parameters
P39.09 Event: MIN Flow Gate Default: W2

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the minimum
position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Defects in the prefeeder control unit
Actions:
Check the control unit.
P39.10 Position MIN Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal from the limit switch on the prefeeder for
the minimum open position.
P39.11 Event: MAX Flow Gate Default: W2

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maximum
position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
P39.12 Position MAX Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder for the
maximum open position.

Event Messages
8 Event Messages
DANGER
Events register abnormal states, e.g. malfunctions or exceeded thre-
shold values.
A running feeder can be a hazard to people or to property.
The cause of event messages must be corrected before events are ac-
knowledged!
Event messages are grouped together.

Group Identifier Event Domain
SY Internally monitoring the control system

SC Irregularities in operator control or peripheral control
WE Fault in the external power electronics
WM Fault in the mechanical system
MF Fault in the bulk material flow
IL Messages from interlocking with system control
CO Internal controller malfunction message
CA Adjustment fault
HI Threshold value exceeded upwards
LO Threshold value exceeded downwards
Tab. 37 : Event groups
Note:
In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
8.1 Events Details
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration

CA01 Event: Error LC Input (P07.04)
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted.
The load cell may be faulty.
Measures:
- check the load cell
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switch-
ed on even after the error has been rectified.

Event Messages
CA02 Event: Tachometer Input (P07.03)

The signals at the feeder drive's impulse speedometer input are outside of the speci-
fied range.
Possible causes:
- there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wir-
ing)
- the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
CA03 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) (P22.07)

Steps to take :
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be
switched on even after the error has been rectified.
CA05 Event: Linearization Error (P38.10)

Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered
CA06 Event: Tare Correction (P28.03)

The tare value calculated by the automatic zeroing system is in excess of
P28.02 Auto Zero Limit or P10.04 Zeroing Limit.
The value is not accepted.
Possible cause:
- changed air characteristics on the route
- shunt forces between the rotor and walls
Actions:
- check the force measurement
- check for friction between the measuring wheel and housing
- check flexible seals
- check the air currents

Event Messages
CA07 Event: DMS-Input (P29.06)

The event is identified if there is a substantial defect in the signal of the pressure
sensor and the pressure signal is read in through the VME interface.
Possible causes:
- defective sensor cable
CA15 Event: Error LC Input (P24.09)

Actions:
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be
switched on even after the error has been rectified.
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement

CH02 Event: Minimum Fill Weight (P25.15)
The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P25.14 Minimum Fill Weight dur-
ing a check. The control measurement is finished early.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density greater than specified
- unfavorable adjustment of P25.12 Check Quantity or P25.14 Minimum Fill Weight
or P25.13 Storage Quantity
CH03 Event: Maximum Fill Weight (P25.17)

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is
finished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P25.13 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control
fill level (P25.16 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts.
In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.

Event Messages
CH04 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error (P25.28)

The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than
the threshold value P25.26 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration.
There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and
enter the result manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement
phase. The correction weighting factor P25.32 Correction Evaluation is not taken into
account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unload-
ing)
CH05 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error (P25.29)

The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value
P25.27 Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic
correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manual-
ly. It is monitored and reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction
weighting factor P25.32 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error
analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unload-
ing)
CH06 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error (P25.30)

The threshold in P25.26 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections
for multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.01 Range Correction

Event Messages
CH07 Event: Relative Span Correction Error (P25.31)

The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P25.27 Rela-
tive Range.
Brel = (1 - B )× 100 %
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)
CH08 Event: Feeder Not Stopped (P25.21)

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
CH09 Event: No Check Release (P25.07)

This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not au-
thorized one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the
missing authorization.
CH10 Event: Prepare Check Measurement (P25.22)

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still great-
er than the maximum check fill level (P25.16 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
CH11 Event: Expect Acceptance (P25.24)

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is
exceeded (P25.03 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction

Event Messages
CH12 Event: Check Gate Error (P25.38)

This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P25.01
Type of Check System = Filling System).
The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P25.37 Check Gate Time
CH13 Event: Bin Error (P25.40)

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the
check. The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the
event class has been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P25.39 Limit Max. Bin Error
CH14 Event: CO-Alarm Hopper (P26.02)

The event is identified when the CO sensor has noted higher values.
Warning: There is the danger of explosion and fire
Possible causes:
Smolder spots or bulk solids burning en route
Actions:
Explosion and fire protection as per the plant's protection strategy
CH15 Event: Min KME Setpoint (P26.10)

It dropped below the lower threshold value of the flow rate during a check measure-
ment (KME). The check was canceled.
This report only acts as a indication of the reason for cancelling the check. This
check should be repeated if the flow rate is sufficiently high.

Event Messages
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller

CO01 Event: Controller Limited (P07.13)
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response
threshold. After a time message HI05 (P07.12) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service
value Y). At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.
CO02 Event: MIN Flow Gate (P39.09)

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the mini-
mum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO03 Event: MAX Flow Gate (P39.11)

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maxi-
mum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO04 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor (P22.29)

The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not
shutting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P22.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false

adjustment of the calculation of the flow rate.

Event Messages
CO06 Event: MAX Flow Gate (B) (P23.39)

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the largest
opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO10 Event: MIN Flow Gate (B) (P23.37)

The prefeeder to the bin has exceeded its limit switch in the direction of the smallest
opening.
Possible causes:
Actions:
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System

WE01 Event: Power Failure (P07.07)
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event
must first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales
will restart.
WE02 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 (P13.09)

Possible cause:

Event Messages

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Event Messages
WE08 Event: Analog Input < Offset (P07.15)

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input
signal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock

IL01 Event: Run Disabled (P04.06)
No release signal from the source determined by P04.05 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not
switched on.
IL02 Event: Mechanics (P33.10)

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic
diagram.
IL03 Event: Electricity (P33.12)

diagram.
IL04 Event: Mechatronics (P33.15)

diagram.
IL05 Event: Not Ready (P33.17)

diagram.
IL06 Event: Not Ready for Start (P33.19)

diagram.

Event Messages
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow

MF03 Event: No Conveying Air (P32.06)
The event is identified when there is a lack of conveying air. There is the danger of
clogging in the route. Furthermore, it is possible that the system cannot convey the
nominal flow rate.
Possible causes:
- compressed air is missing
Actions:
check the compressed air
MF04 Event: No Purge Air (P32.04)

The event is identified when purge air is missing for the bearing of the measuring
wheel. A lack of purge air on the running measuring wheel causes damage in the
bearing.
Possible causes:
- a lack of compressed air
- soiled filter
Steps to be taken;
check the compressed air for bearings
MF05 Event: Moisture MAX (P27.10)

The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has
been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P27.08 Moisture MAX, P27.09 DO: Moisture MAX
MF06 Event: Out of Tolerance (P15.15)

The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces

Event Messages
MF07 Event: Batch setpoint Limit (P15.17)

Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible
upper limit in P15.16 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.16 Batch Setpoint Limit
MF13 Event: Temperature-MAX (P31.08)

The event is identified when the temperature in the meter exceeds the upper thre-
shold value. There is the danger of damage to the meter.
Possible cause:
- higher bulk solid temperature
- a lack of cooling
Potential actions:
- checking the bulk solids
- checking cooling
MF15 Event: Pressure Blower (P32.24)

The pressure in the cooling system is too low. This means that the meter can over-
heat, which might have the effect of igniting an explosive atmosphere.
Possible causes:
- loss of the cooling blower
- soiled filters in the cooling system
Actions:
- checking the cooling blower
MF16 Event: Press. Cooling (P31.13)

The event is identified when the pressure in the cooling system is too low. There is
the danger that the meter becomes too warm and suffers damage.
Potential causes:
- a loss of the compressed air supply
Actions:
- check the cooling plant

Event Messages
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX

HI01 Event: LC Input > MAX (P07.05)
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal
loads of the load cells.

Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX (P09.04)

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equip-
ment
- feed rate setpoint too large
HI05 Event: Deviation (P07.12)

Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the
setpoint over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
- material has been incorrectly handled:
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
- the controller has at times come against its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output
regulator settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical
value that minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable
operation.
Also refer to: P07.11 Deviation abs. max., P07.10 Factor Deviation, P07.09 Thre-
shold Deviation, P07.08 Time Deviation

Event Messages
HI09 Event: Maximum Load (P09.06)

This event is identified when the force on the measuring wheel exceeds the upper
threshold value.
Possible causes:
- bulk solids blocked in the area of the measuring wheel
- measuring wheel covered
Steps to be taken:
Open the MULTICOR equipment and check the measuring wheel for friction
HI10 Event: LC Input > MAX (P22.08)

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI11 Event: Bin Level MAX (P22.19)

Possible cause:
HI13 Event: FC-MAX Limit (P32.18)

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is larger than
the threshold.
Possible reasons:
- the feed hopper is empty
HI14 Event: DMS-Input > MAX (P29.07)

This event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is
over its nominal value.
Possible causes:
- overload on the pressure sensor
- defective sensor

Event Messages
HI15 Event: Bin Level MAX (P24.21)

Possible cause:
CA16 Event: LC Input > MAX (P24.10)

The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal
loads of the load cells.

Possible causes:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can significantly reduce the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI16 Event: Pressure-MAX (P29.15)

The pressure in the bin has exceeded the upper threshold value.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor
8.1.8 Event Group: MIN

LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN (P09.02)
The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate
MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equip-
ment
- feed rate setpoint too low

Event Messages
LO07 Event: Speed-Min (P09.08)

The speed of the measuring wheel has dropped below the lower threshold value.
Measuring the flow rate is afflicted with major defects. The free flow of bulk solids
through the unit is obstructed.
Possible causes:
- the measuring drive is blocked by bulk solids or foreign particles
- there is a defect in the motor of the measuring drive
Actions:
- open the equipment and check the measuring wheel for friction
- check the drive train, motor and motor's drive
LO09 Event: Bin Level MIN (P24.18)

Possible cause:
LO10 Event: DMS-Input < MIN (P29.08)

The event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is
substantially below zero.
Possible causes:
- defective sensor
LO11 Event: Bin Level MIN (P22.16)

Possible cause:
LO13 Event: FC-MIN Limit (P32.17)

The ratio of the actuating variable to the feed rate setpoint of the feeder is smaller
than the threshold.
Possible reasons:
- bulk material is shooting through the discharge unit

Event Messages
LO16 Event: Pressure-MIN (P29.12)

The pressure in the bin has fallen below the lower threshold.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor
8.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring

SC01 Event: Setpoint Limited (P07.06)
Cause of the event:
Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.03 Nominal Flow Rate in
volumetric operation.
SC02 Event: Stand-By (P07.01)

Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is
smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder
drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.
SC03 Event: Maint.Feeder Run (P16.04)

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03
Maintenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC04 Event: Maint. Electric (P16.02)

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time
P16.01 Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC05 Event: External Event 1 (P13.01)

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive

Event Messages

SC10 Event: T_Volum. (P06.04)

This event is identified if the filling time exceeds the threshold value in P06.03
T_Volumetric.
Possible cause:
- storage bin is empty
- storage bin has a blockage
- the filling gate is malfunctioning or is blocked


8.1.10 Event Group: System Message

SY01 Event: Memory (P07.14)
The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred
during that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.
SY02 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 (P01.06)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY03 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 (P01.10)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.

Event Messages
SY04 Event: Communication HMI 1 (P02.06)

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.

Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.

Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
SY07 Event: Communication VHM serial (P02.11)

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM
operating panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485
Address)
SY08 Event: Cyclic Communication (P18.03)

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P18.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10 Event: Acyclic Communication (P18.04)

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer

Event Messages
SY13 Event: Com. Bluetooth (P05.12)

The event is identified when Bluetooth communication to the rotating component of
the meter has been interrupted.
Possible causes:
- major malfunctions in the surroundings
- the loss of the voltage supply of the rotating Bluetooth transmitter
Actions:
- a brief voltage interruption of VCU and the rotating Bluetooth transmitter for initiali-
zation
- check the availability of the rotating Bluetooth transmitter with a scanner in the PC
SY15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 (P01.13)

This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.
SY16 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 (P01.15)

This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.

Appendix
9 Appendix
Details of special functions are described in this chapter.
9.1 Setpoint and switch-

switch-on sources
Setpoint can be set and feed on and off commands can come from different sources.
Fig. 14: Setpoint and switch-on sources
The sources are preselected with parameters in the 'Control Sources' group.
You can use the OP Mode function to switch back and forth between the pre-selected sources and the key-
board (Keyboard Mode ON/OFF [➙ 28]).
Parameter Function Source

P04.01 Feeder Start OP = keyboard
FB = fieldbus
DI = contact
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint OP = keyboard
FB = fieldbus
AI = analog input (A/D)
P04.07 Source Relative Setpoint n/a = not assigned
Setpoint with a percentage quantifier OP = keyboard
AI = analog input
The effective setpoint is displayed on the operating panel. The setpoint input field is only available if the
inputs from the operating panel are allowed by parameter.
A new window for entering the relative component will open when the setpoint field is touched if the relative
setpoint qualifier was pre-selected with the operating panel.

Appendix
Setpoint Synchronization:
The external setpoint will be taken if the source of the setpoint is switched from an external source to the
keyboard (OP). The external source has its effect in the opposite direction.
On / Off Synchronization:
The on/off switch status is retained when switching from an external source to the keyboard (OP). The ex-
ternal source has its effect in the opposite direction.
Mains Power OFF:
The keyboard setpoints are stored.
The flow chart of the start and stop sequence
Fig. 15: The start and stop sequence
Time Condition
1 Feeding does not begin with the on command since the all-clear signal has not been given.
2 To start, the scale requires the rising slope of a start command.
3 Feeding is started with the rising slope.
4 Flow rate control will operate in volumetric operation (also refer to: Volumetric / (Volumetric Syn-
chronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation [➙ 28]) during the start up time defined by T1
= P06.01.
5 Changing over in normal gravimetrically controlled feeding operation (assuming gravimetric mode
was previously selected). Control stays in volumetric mode (assuming it was previously selected by
the operator).
6 Feeding will be switched off if there is no all-clear signal (or if the switch on command was removed).
7 Flow rate recording continues over the time set by T2 = P06.02 to capture trickling bulk solids. After-
wards, the flow rate is no longer calculated; the counter stays at the level already achieved.
Tab. 38 : The states and points in time in the flow chart

Appendix
Parameter Function
P06.01 Duration of the volumetric T1 start up period

P06.02 Continuation of totalizing after turning off T2 feeding (afterflow totalizer)
P04.01 Source of the on signal
P04.05 Source of the all-clear signal
P14.02 Scale signal output switched on
Tab. 39 : The relevant parameters
What to do if there is an alarm:

The feeder drive is switched off immediately if an alarm is triggered. The flow rate will continue to be record-
ed even past the time T2 (P06.02 Measuring Delay).
Measurement and displays:
The platform load will always be calculated and displayed. The flow rate will only be calculated with the
feeder switched on and during the time T2 (P06.02 Measuring Delay).
9.2 Block diagram: measuring the flow rate

Appendix
Fig. 16: A simplified signal flow block diagram of 'calculating the flow rate'
Description Meaning
n The speed of the measuring wheel

H The length of the lever for torque measurement
R The ejection radius of the measuring wheel
LC The force transducer for the torque
f The frequency of the impulse tachometer
Ua The output tension of the force transducer
ROH The unprocessed measurement value of the force transducer
aw The unprocessed measurement value in percent of the rated capacity of the force transducer
gnorm The conversion factor for force measurement
Q The platform load
Pnorm The factor with the geometric dimensions for converting the measured force into the correspond-
ing mass flow

Appendix
Description Meaning
Punlin The measured flow rate (not linearized)
LIN Linearized for the flow rate
P The measured value of the flow rate for display, regulation and totalizing
Tab. 40 : Designations in the signal flow diagram
The measuring wheel exercises a force on the dynamometer (WZ) through lever H. The output tension of
the dynamometer Ua is reinforced and transformed into the unprocessed measurement value with the ana-
log-digital converter A/D .
The flow rate is inversely proportional to the speed n. Flow rate recording is turned off at speeds lower than
0.01 * P05.03.
9.3 The flow rate regulation

A flow rate controller is only available when P03.01 is set to YES.
The flow rate is controlled via volumetric discharge performance of the feeder before the measuring unit.
This output is set by DISOCONT Tersus so that the measured mass flow equals the flow rate setpoint.
Different types of feeder are used. Two different controller models are available for this. The controller mo-
del is selected via P11.01.
The control- P11.01 Controller magni- The feeder model
ler model tude
Constant Continuous 0 (4) ... 20 mA A continuously rotating feeder such as a helix or starwheel, ...
controller The feed gate with built-in pneumatic or electric position control
The parameter has no effect in the Flow Gate block
Step control- Stepping OPEN and CLOSE The feed gate driven by a motor with position feedback
ler contacts The parameters in the Flow Gate block configure the characteris-
tics
Tab. 41 : Controller models and how they are used
9.3.1 Constant controller

The following figure shows a simplified schematic depiction of the control circuit for operating a mass flow
metering unit with the DISOCONT Tersus.

Appendix
Fig. 17: The 'constant controller' signal flow block diagram (simplified)
Signal, block Explanation
Measuring the flow rate For details see Block diagram: measuring the flow rate
[➙ 233]
Message Identifying the event and reporting the state
Q The load on the force transducer for measuring the torque
N The speed of the measuring wheel
I The actual flow rate value [kg/h]
P The flow rate setpoint [kg/h]
Xd Control deviation
P source Selector for the source of the setpoint in P04.02
Sim The switch after simulation operation
K Input via keyboard
S Received via fieldbus
A Analog value

Appendix
Signal, block Explanation

Y The controller magnitude to the external output controller
[mA]
KP The 'P-Component KP' of the controller in mA/% with
reference to the P03.03 nominal flow rate
TN The 'I-Component TN' of the controller. TN is the time
when the same controller magnitude change is caused by
the I-component as through the P-component.
Tab. 42 : Signals, blocks and parameters in the constant controller
Details of the PI controller with a bypass

The central control unit consists of a PI controller for the flow rate of the model
The standard PI controller is also equipped with a setpoint bypass (P11.08). The bypass quickly carries out
setpoint jumps even if the controller is set slowly. Beyond this, the bypass allows controlled (volumetric)
operation.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller through a reconstruction of the
controlled member (P11.10 and P11.11). The controller is also equipped with controller magnitude limitation
(P11.04 and P11.05) dependant upon the setpoint. The controller is stopped and an event is identified
(message) when reaching the lower or upper controller magnitude limit.
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the
following diagram.
Parameter value Special case
KP = 0 I-controller: TN is the reciprocal value of the integration constants,

i.e., the larger value = the slower controller KI = 1/TN in % / (mA/s)
TN = 0 P-controller: I-portion will be deleted
KP=TN=0 Controller output = controller increase
Tab. 43 : Special cases for KP and TN parameters
Parameters Effect
P06.01 The duration of volumetric start-up operation once the scales have been switched on in s
Volumetric Start-Up
P11.09 NO: The integral component is not stored when switched off
Store YES: The integral component is stored when switched off and it has an impact when start-
ing up
YES-A: The integral component is stored when switched off and it has an impact when
starting up if feeding is not switched off by an alarm.

Appendix
Parameters Effect
P11.08 One value is superimposed additively on the actuating variable, proportionally to the pre-
Bypass set setpoint. This parameter gives the bypass value for the nominal setpoint.
P11.10 The filters delay the setpoint for the controller while the bypass comes to the controller
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord magnitude output without a delay.
This has the purpose of approximately adjusting the time characteristics of the controlled
P11.11 member to prevent the actual value from overshooting on setpoint jumps.
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord
P11.15 This additional constant integral member in the control deviation branch can have the
Compensation Element following favorable effects:
Contouring errors brought about by monotonous variable malfunctions (such as control
measurement equipment)
Constant control deviations with actuators with a non-symmetric effect.
The compensation element only has an impact in gravimetric operation and P11.15 para-
meters unequal to zero. The input and output are limited to ± 5 %.
P11.16 This parameter can be used to evaluate the proportional component of the controller de-
KP Adaptation pendant upon the target flow rate.
KP control= 1 : KP is independent of the setpoint
KP control = 0 : KP decreases in proportion to the setpoint
KP control = 2 : KP increases in proportion to the setpoint.
P11.17 The upper limit for evaluating the control deviation by the setpoint as per P11.16
Setpoint Threshold
Tab. 44 : Set-up notes for parameters in the constant controller
Condition Characteristics
Changing the values of the The integral component is not converted when parameters are changed, which means
parameters that there might be jumps in the controller magnitude Y. If these jumps cannot be
tolerated, there should only be major changes in the (P11.08) bypass when feeding is
switched off.
Network connection The stored values in the integral component and in the filters are set to zero.
Switch off feeding Stored components of the setpoint filter are set to zero. The value of the integral com-
ponent is determined by P11.09.
Starting up feeding The feeder is switched on when all conditions are met.
The controller magnitude is set to the value of the setpoint bypass. The rise in P11.06
and the stored I-component of the controller overlap one another consecutively as per
P11.09.
The setpoint filter starts working simultaneously from zero.
The flow rate controller works according to P06.01 in volumetric operation during the
start-up period. After the start-up period, the controller ts released and gravimetric
operation begins.
Standby The drive for protecting the motor is switched off if the internal controller magnitude
drops below the limit set in P07.02 longer than three seconds. The controller magni-
tude is set to the lower value corresponding to P11.06. It continues to report outwards
that feeding is in progress.
The controller does not function and the integral component of the flow rate controller
is deleted or retained depending on P11.09.
Measurement remains active.
It switches to normal operation if the internal controller magnitude exceeds the limits
set in P07.02.
Gravimetric operating mode The actual flow rate value is set to the effective setpoint through the material feeder.

Appendix
Condition Characteristics
Volumetric operating mode Only the setpoint bypass and rise act as a controller magnitude. The feeder is con-
trolled proportional to the setpoint. The integral component of the controller is deleted
regardless of the P11.09 while the setpoint filters continue to run.
Volumetrically synchronous In contrast to volumetric operation, switching synchronously from gravimetric to volu-
operation type metric makes it possible to switch over from the gravimetric operating mode without a
bump by including the current controller output value.
Simulation The control circuit is closed internally in simulation operation. The measured values Q
and n are also simulated (Q=Qnominal, n = nominal speed).
The simulated value is shown as the flow rate. The controller magnitude Y is propor-
tional to the setpoint and is 10 mA specifying the nominal setpoint.
The operation types, switch on/off sources and setpoint sources function as usual in
simulation operation.
The task: testing the plant, especially the control processes. Learning operation.
The characteristics in the The components stored in the controller are set to zero when selectively switching off
'Prefeeder – Stop' mode the feeder just as when switching off feeding. However, totalizing continues to functi-
on.
Tab. 45 : Characteristics in special operational states
Monitoring control deviation
The control deviation is displayed and monitored in gravimetric operation only.
The display, but not the monitoring system input, is filtered by parameter P08.05.
Event message 'P07.08' will be triggered if the value of the error signal Xd exceeds the limit value S1 for a
duration defined in parameter Event: Deviation. Monitoring will restart if the error signal falls below the thre-
shold during this time.
At the same time, the control deviation value is filtered (filter time in parameter P07.08) and the filter output
is monitored. Event 'Event: Deviation' will be identified if the filter output exceeds the threshold value S2.
Threshold values S1 and S2 can be adapted to the current flow rate setpoint by means of the following for-
mulas:
S1 = P07.09 * [P07.10 + (1 - P07.10) * Flow rate setpoint / P03.03]
S2 = P07.11 * [P07.10 + (1 - P07.10) * Flow rate setpoint / P03.03]
The following diagram illustrates the relationship using with examples for threshold value S1.
P Flow rate setpoint V Limit value S1 or S2

LIM Limit Value in P07.09 or P07.11 F Influence Factor P07.10

Appendix
9.3.2 Step controller

The controller functions as a three-point switch to moving position-controlled flow gates and feed gates
OPEN and CLOSED, etc. The controller model is switched on through P11.01 = stepping and is only availa-
ble for feeding systems (P03.01 = YES).
The controller structure:
Fig. 18: The signal flow block diagram step controller

Appendix
Parameters Effect
P11.12 The proportional component of the step controller.

The reference quantity is the nominal flow rate in P03.03
P11.13 Readjusting time
This is the time when the same controller magnitude change is brought about by the integral
component as through the proportional component.
P11.14 The trigger threshold in % of P03.03
The trigger threshold should be greater than the smallest possible step of the actuator.
The feeder stands still if the control deviation is smaller than the trigger threshold.
P11.15 The time constant of the compensation element
The compensation element contains an additional integrator (refer toconstant controller [➙ 235])
to balance out contouring errors dependant upon bin levels. The compensation element only
functions in gravimetric operation.
The compensation element is ineffective at P11.15 = 0
Tab. 46 : The control parameters for the step controller
Value Meaning
Network ON Delete all elements to be stored

(the controller and compensation integrator)
Scales OFF The contact feeder ON is reset and all elements to be stored are de-
leted.
Scales ON The scale begins to work until the elapse of the start-up period in
volumetric operation.
Afterwards, it switches over to gravimetric regulation.
Volumetric operation Switch M to vol/start-up
The feeder is set to a position proportional to the setpoint. The
compensation integrator is deleted and becomes ineffective.
Gravimetric operation Switch M in the designated position.
The actual flow rate value is set to the effective setpoint through the
position of the feeder.
The compensation integrator is active.
Tab. 47 : Switching and operational states

Appendix
The internal structure of the step controller
Fig. 19: The feed gate control logic
The EXTERNAL component is not a part of the DISOCONT Tersus. Instead, it is only a proposal for creat-
ing local switching for connecting to an FAE 8202 model power unit.
Drawing elements Meaning
Switch menu The operating elements of the control unit or in EasyServe

MIN The limit switch for the MIN feeder position
MAX The limit switch for the MAX feeder position
Tab. 48 : Some signals of the control logic
The OPEN, STOP and CLOSED switch positions are only available with manual control of the feeder.
The Min and Max limit switches keep the limit positions of the feeder from being overrun.

Appendix
9.4 Batch Operation Control

The following figure shows the batching operation process.
Fig. 20: Batching flow chart without setpoint ramp
0 ... 5 Transitions in state (see table) T3 P15.03 Adaptation Time
m The fed mass PB Batching setpoint in kg
T2 P06.02 Measuring Delay Measure Recording the actual flow rate and calculating the
totalizing counter
PR Effective flow rate setpoint Feed The switch-on command to the feeder's discharge
organ
Main_Spd The command for feeding in full feed Dbl_Spd The command for feeding in dribble feed
B_On The batch running output signal
ON Output signal active OFF Output signal passive
NOTE: The most important settings for batching are made in the Batch Mode block of parameters.
State Transitions During Feeding as per the Flow Chart Diagram

No. Transition in states
0 Start the batch by switching on the scales.

NOTE: First of all, it is necessary to key in the batch setpoint because it cannot be changed any more when
the batch is running.
1 Interrupt operation by turning off the scales. The totalizing counter measures for the time T2 entered in
P06.02.
2 Resume batch by turning on the scales. That is also possible during the time T2.

Appendix
No. Transition in states

3 The flow rate setpoint is reduced to zero (but only with controlling systems) and the P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed
and P15.10 DO: Full Feed signals swap levels.
The point in time for switching is the defined Adaptation Time T3 before the calculated end point in time of the
batch (reaching the batch setpoint).
4 A batch is ended if the setpoint is reached minus the 'Correction Amount' contained in P15.04 or if the effec-
tive setpoint becomes equal to zero in cases A1 and A2. A batch is ended in case B no later than after the
expiration of three times the adaption time T3 (P15.03).
With a measuring scales, the dribble feed quantity (pre-contact) results from the adaptation time set multiplied
by the dribble feed starting value.
5 The bulk solid flow is further recorded for the time T2. That also includes the remaining trickle of bulk solids in
the measured value.
A new batch can only be started after the afterflow time has elapsed.
Tab. 49 : Process: discharge weighing with a regulating loss-in-weight feeder
Adaptation
With adaptation, a corrective quantity K is calculated from the error quantity (batch actual weight - weight
setpoint) after each completed batch and stored in the P15.04 parameter. This automatically shifts items 3
to 5 of the diagram with the next batch.
K(new) = K(old) + P15.05 * error
K(new) = new corrective quantity
Error = actual batch weight – batch setpoint
Errors greater than the batching tolerance set by P15.14 are restricted to the set tolerance value. Shortfalls
that are smaller than the smallest display digit are not corrected.
P15.05 acts as a filter parameter to ensure that P15.04 contains a mean for the bulk material overrun with.
Behavior if Alarm Triggered

If an alarm is triggered, the batch is interrupted as if feeding were switched off. The batch can be resumed
once the cause has been rectified and the event message acknowledged.
Threshold values
The P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN event message is suppressed during the rundown time. This does
not apply to the digital output.
Feed controller in standby mode

The scales can go into standby operating mode during rundown time (P07.02). The corresponding message
is suppressed.

Appendix
9.5 Bin weigher: Scaling and threshold value
Fig. 21: Scaling fill level measurement and threshold values
This display applies to the first bin weigher with parameters in the 'Bin Weigher' block. The values apply
correspondingly to the second bin weigher with the parameters in the Second Bin Weigher block.
The 100 % value of the control scale is the total of the nominal loads of the bins whose levels are used as a
check as per P25.02.
The normal scales applies in normal operation. The fill level is regulated by the metering hopper. In intermit-
tent operation the metering hopper is activated when the fill level F-Min is underrun and is deactivated as
soon as the F-Max level is exceeded. If the metering hopper is continuously active (P23.01 = YES), the fill
level is regulated to the fill level setpoint F-Set by means of the changes in the metering hopper flow rate.
The check measurement takes over the fill regulation when a check is started. Wherever necessary, it is
filled until there are sufficient bulk solids in the bin (fill level > C-Check + C-Min). The check starts when the
fill level falls below F-Max and is stopped when the fill level falls below C-Min.

Appendix
9.6 Continuous bin fill level control
Fig. 22: VMC bin fill level controller
The fill level controller only works for the first Bin Weigher, although not for any Second Bin Weigher availa-
ble.

Appendix
Setup Notes
P23.12 can be determined in a stationary state once the transient oscillations have subsided. In this state,
the value is calculated as follows:
P23.12 = (yB - P23.14 ) × P03.03 / flow rate setpoint
We recommend calling up the Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation [➙ 39] adjustment program for the
control parameter after entering input the P23.07 and P23.12 parameters.
9.7 Bin fill level regulation via feed gate

Appendix
Fig. 23: Step controller for the bin fill level
Abbreviation Meaning
B-S: Xd Service value: the control deviation for the position controller
B: Position Service value: the position of the feed gate

Appendix
Abbreviation Meaning
a) P The flow rate setpoint (P) with feeding systems
b) I The actual flow rate (I) with measuring systems
B: Xd Service value: the control deviation for the fill level controller
StepCTRL Step controller
PosCTRL The position controller for the feed gate
PowerCTRL The power control for the feeder
Conti_M Continuous measurement of the flow rate
MIN The limit switch of the minimum position
MAX The limit switch of the maximum position
Tab. 50 : The meaning of the abbreviations in the block diagram

Appendix
9.8 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME)
Fig. 24: Flow chart control measurement

Appendix
9.9 Adjusting linearization

The correlation between the actual and measured flow rate can deviate from the ideal straight line for differ-
ing flow rates. Some reasons might be material build-up on the measuring wheel or particles of bulk solids
not recorded on a measuring wheel with blades open upwards.
Please comply with the position of the linearizer in the signal branch as per the figure in Block diagram:
measuring the flow rate [➙ 233] when adjusting linearization. It is necessary to make control measure-
ments with bulk solids (Check with bulk solids [➙ 50]; Automatic control measurement unit (KME) [➙ 41])
when adjusting the linearization points.
Before adjusting linearization, it is necessary to calibrate the measuring equipment with linearization
(P38.01 = NO) switched off. Then call up the tare function [➙ 37] without bulk solids after keying in the re-
levant parameters. Finally, it is necessary to make an initial measurement with bulk solids at the highest
possible flow rate to check and readjust the proportionality factor P10.01 Range Correction between the
measured value and flow rate wherever necessary.
Linearization should be carried out at k (k < 5) measuring points with differing flow rates I(k) in the flow rate
zone relevant to production. We recommend distributing the points I(k) with equal spaces over the relevant
zone. There is an additional point at flow rate = zero that is automatically adjusted by taring without a flow of
bulk solids. The curve is continued at a constant gradient above the highest point. This is why the two high-
est points should be sufficiently far apart from another to correctly define the gradient.
Furthermore, the points in both axes have to be rising monotonically.
Fig. 25: Linearization
Ideal: Straight course of the correlation between the measured value and actual flow rate
Real: The calculated non-linear course of the real characteristic curve
The figure shows the selected measuring points of the flow rate in the horizontal axis. The S(k) values to be
keyed into the parameters are as follows:
S(k) = I(k) / (P03.03 * P10.01) * 100 % ; k = 1, 2, 3, 4
The value S(k) can be read out during the measurement from the Unlin. Flow Rate service value. If the
measurement takes place in the operation controlled by the flow rate, I(k) corresponds to the flow rate set-
point used.
The value R(k,n+1) to be adjusted in the parameters of the vertical axis after making the measurement re-
sults from the value of the corresponding parameter R(k,n) that is active during the measurement, the value

Appendix
ms of the conveyed quantity ascertained on a sufficiently precise static scale and the meter progress mc of
the Coriolis measuring unit:
R(n+1) = R(n) * ms/mc
The flow rate naturally deviates from the flow rate I(k) in the middle of the measurement at the start and end
of the measurement. To ensure that these effects have the smallest possible impact on parameter adjust-
ment, the start phase should be as brief as possible until reaching the flow rate I(k) and the take-off phase
should be as brief as possible in relation to the entire duration of the measurement. This can be supported
with a quick controller adjustment with systems controlled by flow rate. If the start- and take-off phase can-
not be selected to be brief in relation to the overall duration, all linearization points should be preset and
then checked and recalibrated. Suitable controller adjustment should guarantee a flow rate that is as con-
stant as possible during the measurement.
We recommend depicting the actual values of linearization for the plausibility control graphically.
9.10 Correction with a known quantity

In special applications with batch systems, the continuous scale records both an already known quantity of
bulk solids A and an unknown quantity of bulk solids B to be measured.
Fig. 26: System architecture and signal processing
A Bin with bulk solids A

B Bin with bulk solids B
MA The measuring unit for the flow of bulk solids A
MC The measuring unit for the flow of bulk solids C = A + B
I-cor The configuration of the correction value. Relevant parameters:
P04.10 Difference Flow Rate
P04.11 Difference Flow Rate Range
P04.12 Difference Flow Rate Offset
P04.13 Difference Function
IA The measured actual flow rate of bulk solids A
IC The measured actual flow rate of bulk solids C = A + B
IB The calculated actual flow rate of bulk solids B

Appendix
R Optional controller (only with controlled systems)

yA, yB Optional controller magnitude to the prefeeder for the components (only with controlled systems)
Tab. 51 : Legend
The P04.13 parameter decides on whether the correction to the shown actual flow rate and quantity integra-
tion derived from that or/and to the input signal of the optional controller has an impact. This makes it possi-
ble to easily control the bulk solids component B even in this architecture.
9.11 Controlling tube type check bins

The bin for the automatic control measurement with coal dust feeding is frequently designed as a tube. The
bin is completely filled with bulk solids in normal operation. Feeding into the bin is interrupted by a slide for a
material check. Since the slide displaces bulk solids when moving in, it may only be moved in when there is
a sufficient quantity of bulk solids in the flow. If these conditions are not met, it cannot be checked. The con-
trol system takes the necessary conditions into account and thus protects the slide from damage.
Furthermore, the control system reacts to irregularities that indicate burning particles (high level of CO con-
tent in the air) and excess pressure. The control is also interrupted in these cases and the feed to the bin is
opened again to displace the air needed for combustion from the bin.

Appendix
Fig. 27: The tube control logic for check bins
Signal The The name of the parameters Meaning

appropriate
parameter
Alarm P14.04 DO: ALARM There is an alarm in the scale

Fill P22.14 DO: Bin Filling Bin filling active
I>MIN P26.09 Min. KME Feedrate The setpoint of the flow rate is sufficiently
high
p-MAX P29.16 DO: Pressure-MAX The internal bin pressure is in excess of the
permissible threshold value
Local P13.16 DI: Local Mode Local operation preselected
CO-MAX P26.01 DI: CO-Alarm Hopper There is higher CO concentration which
indicates a smolder spot
CH P25.23 DO: Check Measurement Active The control measurement is in measuring
phase
F-MIN P22.17 DO: Bin Level MIN The bin fill level < MIN threshold value
Gate FB P26.04 Check Valve Feedback Feedback: the shut-off valve is open
Fill FB P25.20 Feeder Stopped Feedback: the feed element is switched off

Appendix
Signal The The name of the parameters Meaning

appropriate
parameter
Open Gate P26.03 DO: Check Valve Open the shut-off valve
A current check is interrupted if the slide is
not closed during the check.
Cancel CH P25.11 Finish Check Measurement Interrupt a control measurement
Vent P26.05 DO: Hopper Aeration Switch on the bin ventilation
Gate Open P26.07 DO Check Gate Opened Message: the slide is open
dp-Comp P26.06 DO Pressure Compen. Open the pressure equalization line
Filling P26.08 DO Check Gate Closed Message: the feed element is switched off
stopped
Tab. 52 : The meaning of the signals
9.12 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking'
Fig. 28: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages
Explanations:
All signal levels can be inverted by setting the associated source parameter (also refer to Configuring the
Interfaces [➙ 56]). The factory setting is given in the diagram.
▪
LOW: closed contact in standby, i.e. power is on. The contact is open if the signal is active (functions as
opener).

Appendix
▪
HIGH: open contact in standby, i.e. power is not on. The contact is closed if the signal is active (func-
tions as closer).
E: event message
DI: digital input
DO: digital output
Legend Parameter Signal Name
Alarm All event messages of event class ALARM

DI E 1 P33.06 DI: Event Electricity 1
DI EE 1 P13.02 DI: External Event 1
DI M 1 P33.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1
DO E P33.11 DO: Event Electricity
DO M P33.09 DO: Event Mechanics
DO MT 1 P33.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1
DO MT 2 P33.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2
DO R P33.16 DO: Ready
DO RS P33.18 DO: Ready for Start
IL-2 P33.10 Event: Mechanics
IL-3 P33.12 Event: Electricity
IL-4 P33.15 Event: Mechatronics
IL-5 P33.17 Event: Not Ready
IL-6 P33.19 Event: Not Ready for Start
Int. alarm Internal alarm resulting from event messages CA01, CA02,
WM01, WM02, WM03, WM04
NO S No service mode: no keyboard mode, no local mode,
No simulation mode
Release P04.05 Source Run Enable
SC-5 P13.01 Event: External Event 1
SC-6 P13.03 Event: External Event 2
SC-11 P13.06 DI: External Event 3
SC-12 P13.08 DI: External Event 4

Appendix
NOTE: When an input source parameter accepts the value n/a, the signal is internally assumed to
be True.
9.13 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs
It is usual for some signals to be read in through sensors with strain gauges (DMS) such as weight, force or
pressure signals. In special cases, these signals are recorded with other types of sensors or reshaped ex-
ternally so that they are available in the form of standard signals (such as 4 ... 20 mA). DISOCONT Tersus
provides the option of reading in some sources of input signals via standard signals. The standard signal is
read in through an analog VAI 20100 interface and reshaped to make it correspond to the signal of a DMS
sensor. The remaining signal processing is identical for the DMS signal and standard signal.
Some measuring signals can also be read in by fieldbus to prevent faults on the transmission path. These
are also processed like DMS signals after appropriate conversion.
Fig. 29: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin
LC DMS load cell output voltage 0 - 20 mA Input current from the external sensor
FB:kg The weight value in kg transmitted [mV/V] A signal with the dimension mV/V
from the fieldbus
Adjust Handing over the signal to the set-up LC [mV/V] The service value of the load in the dimen-
program sion mV/V
LC_0 The rated load cell load in P22.04 LC [%] The service value of the load in percent of
LC_0
X0 Offset analog input in P22.30 Xn Range characteristic value in P22.31
V Transmission factor of the load cell in x, y Input and output values of the calculating
P22.03 blocks

Appendix
Error Error signal if the physical signal is out Source Selecting the source for the signal in P22.02
of range
Corr Multiplicative correction of the trans- Tare Zero signal in P22.25 such as determined by
mission factor in P22.24 the set-up program
L The load for further use of the applica-

tion software
This figure uses recording the weight of an additional bin as an example of the form the signals of sources
other than DMS load cells are processed in. The set-up programs and service displays (including the para-
meters for tare and correcting sensitivity) remain in manual override, even though they show some values
such as for the DMS load cells. The figure applies accordingly to other signals such as force or pressure.
The corresponding parameters are in the group that also contains the parameter for selecting the signal
source.
NOTE: Please bear the fact in mind that the value resolution of a value read in through the stan-
dard signal is reduced by the resolution of the external transmitter and the VAI 20100 inter-
face assembly in relation to the input for DMS via interface VME0120 (VME0120: 24 bits
and VAI 20100: 16 bits). In addition, there can also be a temporal offset of the signal due to
scanning.
There can be additional errors in particular when forming the difference of signals (such as
differentiating) or a compensator (such as pressure compensation).
9.14 PLC Functionality (Optional)

As with a PLC, you can expand its functionality for additional simple jobs by linking signals and using func-
tion blocks. The function block links can only be configured using EasyServe. Any configuration created can
be loaded into or read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately after being
loaded.
All signals that can are available via fieldbus can be used as input signals for the function blocks. The output
signals are integrated into the standard signal processing of DISOCONT Tersus with the parameters of the
FCB analog outputs and FCB digital outputs groups.
A loaded and active link is shown on the operator panel with the information for the program by pressing the
Help button. The Empty link designates the factory default without added links.

Appendix
Fig. 30: Example of a function block link
In this example, a binary input signal (for instance, an input contact of DISOCONT Tersus) is being read in
through the GP-Din 1 input block and the Delay 1 delay while an inverter is given to the And1-4 AND gate.
The other inputs are linked with the constant 1 and a Cycle 1 frequency generator. This provides the output
with a cyclical signal when the waiting period has elapsed after setting the input. The output of the AND gate
is linked to an output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The physical output requires connecting
the signal with a digital output through P35.01 FCB_DO 01.
9.14.1 Handling the Function Blocks

Condition: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN (VPL 20430) must be installed on the
PC.
Function blocks can be edited and linked in EasyServe Expert Mode only.
For this DISOPLAN must be started with administrator rights from EasyServe as follows:
▪
Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Blocks', or
▪
Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Variants/parameters'
Supplementary documentation:
▪
BV-H2185 EasyServe operating manual
▪
BV-H2461 DISOPLAN operating manual
A detailed description of the function block editor can be found in a separate manual (BV-
H2317)
CAUTION: Creating and modifying links is reserved solely to Schenck Process person-
nel.

Appendix
Configurations can be read out of and loaded into the control. They can be filed on the hard disk of PCs and
called up from there. Links have to be given a name. The empty link (as a factory default) has the name
Empty and should not be used for other links.
WARNING
Possible loss of function when exchanging the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded, it will be necessary to store it
separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is exchanged, both the parameters
and the function block link have to be loaded separately to restore full func-
tionality. Alternatively, you can use the additionally installed tool
DISOPLAN (that contains both the parameters and the function block links)
to make a complete backup. However, this backup can then no longer be
used for setting a more recent version of the program in the scale.
It is not necessary with a system with the Empty link (refer to Cleaning the Screen and Information [➙ 36])
to reload the link after exchanging the VCU since there is no expansion to the functions from the function
blocks.
Loading the function software or loading default settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have
any impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is retained. Any
loaded link cannot be deleted; it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be
overwritten with a new link that has to contain at least one block.
A loaded link does not have any effect on scales operation as long as the outputs for the link are not
coupled to the scales software with the corresponding parameters P34.01 to P35.20.
9.14.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals

The following function blocks are available.
Fig. 31: Binary function blocks

Appendix
No. Type quantity Parameter Function
1 Binary input 20 Process variable as per the de- Connection of the function block logic
'GP-DIn' scription of the fieldbus interface to the function of the standard pro-
gram
2 Binary output 20 - Makes output signals available. Con-
'GP-Dout' nect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Clock generator 2 Period duration Signal generator for a periodic signal.
'Cycle'
4 'Bin. 0' 1 - Encoder for the binary constants 1 =
'Bin. 1' 1 True and 0 = False
5 Pulse generator 1 Time for the pulse The timer has three outputs that
'Timer' supply an pulse of 0.1 seconds dura-
tion at the time set.
6 AND 6 - AND link between two input signals
'And'
AND 4 - AND link between four input signals
'And 4'
7 OR 6 - OR link between two input signals
'Or'
OR 8 - OR link between four input signals
'Or 4'
8 Negation 10 - Inverts the signal
'Not'
9 Retardation 8 Delay time in seconds Delays the input signal by the speci-
'Delay' fied time
Tab. 53 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
9.14.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals

Analog signals can be processed with the following function block.

Appendix
Fig. 32: Analog function blocks
1 Analog input 20 Process variable as per Input for a variable with a continuous value.
'GP-AIn' the description of the
fieldbus interface
2 Analog output 20 - Makes output signals available. Connecting via
'GP-Aout' parameters in the FCB analog outputs block. Only 5
FKB outputs can be configured to physical outputs.
All outputs are available as measured values in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Comparator 6 Upper and lower com- Supplies the 'True' value if the input signal lies out-
'Comparator' parative value side of the threshold values.
4 'Limit' 10 Upper and lower thre- Limits the input signal and becomes True when the
shold value limiter arises.
5 Multiplier 5 - Supplies the product of the input values at the out-
'Multiplier' put.
6 Memory 2 - The input value at MemInp is tied to Acquire with

'Memory' the increasing slope. It is available at the output. At
the same time, the Hold output indicates that a
value has been stored. The memory can be cleared
with Reset.
7 Addition 5 - Makes the sum of the input values available at the
'Add' output.
8 Subtraction 5 - Makes the difference of the input values available at

'Subtract' the output
9 Counter 6 Start value Supplies the counted input impulses at the output

Appendix

'Counter'
10 Switch 1 - Switches one of the three inputs to the output
'analog switch'
11 Multiplication 20 Dividend Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor
'Factor' Divisor
12 Constant 5 The value of the con- Supplies the numerical value at the output
'Constant' stants
13 Offset 10 Dividend
'Offset' Divisor
9.15 Setting the Pressure Compensation
The electronic pressure compensation compensates for the force components in the hopper weight signal
caused by pressure in the hopper. The pressure forces can be great even if the pressures are low, resulting
in significant errors in weight measurement.
Pressure compensation only affects the main bins (refer to the Bin Weigher for the appropriate parameters).

Appendix
Fig. 33: The signal flow diagram for pressure compensation for the bins
The pressure in the hopper is best measured by a DMS pressure sensor for purposes of electronic compen-
sation. The input for the pressure sensor is defined by P29.02.
The parameters for the pressure sensor are entered into P29.03 and P29.04. For atmospheric pressure
(hopper open) the measured pressure will be read as a service value and entered into P29.09.

Appendix
Make a note of the weight recorded for the no-pressure state.

If possible, now apply a constant pressure to the hopper. The screw discharge must be plugged up (bulk
material or a seal) and all fill unit connections must be closed and sealed. The weight signal will increase if a
positive pressure is applied. Using P29.10 the compensation can be set so that the same weight value is
recorded under application of this pressure as previously with no pressure applied.
The function of compensation can be checked at any time with constant bin weight and variable pressure.
The weight display in the stationary state has to be independant of pressure. There might be slight fluctua-
tions in the weight displayed if there are changes to pressure.
9.16 Safety Function for Feeding

Feeding Hazardous Materials (Coal Dust)
To boost security, the access to the parameters and calibration functions from the VHM operating panel
should be secured by a differing password (P02.12, P02.13) when using the feeder to convey pulverized
coal.
The security functions have to be activated by keying a code into P32.01 Safety activation: Option code.
The parameter then shows SAFETY SET:Enabled. The safety functions can be deactivated only with a code
valid for the special unit. Both codes can be generated only by Schenck Process.
Simulation operation cannot be preselected with active security functions.

The range of adjustments that can be made to parameters is restricted:
▪
The setpoint is always set to zero when the scales are OFF (P32.12 = YES).
▪
The FC conveyor element control (security switch) always monitors the controller magnitude Y depend-
ing upon the setpoint.
▪
The parameter used to increase the setpoint per entry (P32.09) is limited to maximum 30 % and the
parameter used to decrease the setpoint (P32.10) is limited to maximum 50 %.
▪
The parameter setpoint factor (P32.11) for increasing the possible setpoint alterations when the scales
are switched off is limited to a maximum of 10.
▪
Event class ALARM only is permitted for the following event messages. Any other entries will be reset to
ALARM.
– Interrupted communications SY .. at the local bus between VCU 1 and the connected VCU expan-
sion units (parameter block 'Hardware Modules')
– CA01, Event: Error LC Input (Bin) (P07.04)
– CA02, Event: Tachometer Input (P07.03)
– HI01, Event: LC Input > MAX (P07.05)
– MF03, Event: No Conveying Air (P32.06)
– MF04, Event: No Purge Air (P32.04)
– HI09, Event: Maximum Load (P09.06) and restriction Value for Load-Max (P09.03) < 100 %
– LO07, Event: Speed-Min (P09.08) and restriction Speed-Min Value (P09.07) > 50 %
– WE02, Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 (P13.09)
– SY08, Event: Cyclic Communication (P18.03)
– LO13, Event: FC-MIN Limit (P32.17)
▪
Furthermore, the following parameters are restricted in their value range:
– Constant controller always active: P03.01 = YES, P11.01 = continuous
– Feeder Check FC (P32.13) always active (P32.13 = Y)
– Time Deviation (P07.08) < 30 s
– Threshold Deviation (P07.09) < 5 %
– Filter: Deviation (P08.05) < 3 s
– Volumetric Start-Up (P06.01) < 2 s
– Store (P11.09) = NO
– Speed Measurement (P05.01) = VCU1, DI6
– LC: Load Measurement (P05.04) = VCU1, LC1

Appendix
9.17 Actuating Variable Safety Functions

If hazardous materials (combustibles) are to be conveyed, control deviation monitoring (P07.08 ... P07.12)
should be activated and set with reasonable values.
There is a safety monitor available with which the mechanics and the weighing mechanisms can be further
observed that monitors the relationship between actuating variable and flow rate setpoint. An event mes-
sage is generated and the corresponding output set if it exceeds certain set limits.
WARNING
We strongly recommend that you activate the monitoring if combus-
tibles are to be conveyed, as a failed sensor (speed sensor or weight
measurement) may lead to overfilling. The control deviation monitor
must be set correctly.
An overdosage could lead to a fire or an explosion with severe conse-
quences for personnel and equipment.
Fig. 34: Actuating variable safety circuit
Symbol Meaning
P [%] Flow rate setpoint as a % of the nominal flow rate P03.03

P0 Rated flow rate:P03.03

Appendix
Symbol Meaning
Y[%] Actuating variable output to the discharge element in mA or % under consideration of off-
set and maximum value
P Change of the setpoint
MIN-Area A MIN event is identified if the value lies within this area
MAX-Area A MAX event is identified if the value lies within this area
OK Normal area in which no event is identified
E Change of the setpoint, related to the nominal output
FC-Deviation [%] Deviation from the optimum value of the current value in % of the tolerance effective for the
current flow rate setpoint. An event will be generated if FC-Deviation = ±100 %.
The tolerance range is increased for changes of setpoint. The tolerance values set by parameter will be
increased by the percentage rate of the change in the moments after a setpoint change.
EXAMPLE: A sudden change of setpoint of 50 % of the rated output increases directly after the change a
tolerance set by parameter from 25 % to 75 %. If the setpoint remains the same, the increase will reduce
exponentially towards zero with a set time constant of 10 s, i.e. long after the change the tolerance will have
the same effect as the setting made by parameter.
The service value FC act. Deviation shows the current deviation of the ratio between the actual value and
the ideal value as a % of the permissible tolerance Y_tol.
Values > 100 % will trigger a MAX event, values < -100 % will trigger a MIN event.
The value 'FC-Deviation' is calculated from the current actuating variable Y [%] and the flow rate setpoint
P [%] based on the current tolerance Y_tol as follows:
FC-Deviation = (Y [%] – P [%]) / Y_tol * 100 %
Y_tol is the tolerance at the operating point P [%] set by parameter and possible increaesed by a compo-
nent from setpoint changes.
9.18 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters

DISOCONT Tersus has three internal totalizing integrators (= totalizing counters). The findings of the coun-
ters can be transferred to an external counter by one of the following ways:
▪
Via the electronic impulse output (open collector) DO8 of the VCU at a frequency < 10 Hz for external
electronic counters. This is the most preferable method.
▪
Via a DO1 ... DO7 of the VCU. The minimum impulse length is 1 s and the lifecycle of the output relay is
only guaranteed for 20 million switchovers.
Of course, the counter readings can be read more simply via fieldbus or in the web server.
The relevant parameters are:
P03.08 Pulse Length Total
P03.09 DO: Pulse Counter
P03.10 Totalizer Increment

Appendix
P03.09 DO: Pulse Counter P03.08 Pulse Length Total
0 ... 9 ms 10 ms ... 1 s >1s

DO8 No impulse 10 ms ... 1 s >1s
DO1 ... DO7 No impulse 1s >1s
Tab. 54 : The length of the counting pulse
P03.10 Totalizer Increment Counting impulse weight determined by:

0 kg No impulse
> 0 kg P03.10 Totalizer Increment
Tab. 55 : The significance of the pulse weight
9.19 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation

Most of the function errors are indicated by event messages.
A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently
wrong despite correct parameterization.
A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating vol-
tage supply to the load cells.
A test connector can narrow down any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
Fig. 35: Test Connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus instead of the load
cell cable.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electron-
ics. It must have the following value: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V ± 3 %.
Note: The raw measured data can be calculated according to the formula: raw measured data ~ 500 *
R2 / R1 [mV/V] if other resistance values should be used in the test connector
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the way the scale's rated data are set.

Index
Index
2. Password ..................................................................................................................................................................... 87
Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................................... 56
About This Manual ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Absolute Range.............................................................................................................................................................. 165
Accept Correction ........................................................................................................................................................... 161
Access Rights Limitation FB........................................................................................................................................... 130
Access Rights Limitation HMI........................................................................................................................................... 85
Access to Special Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 22
Accessing the Configuration............................................................................................................................................. 33
Acknowledging Event Messages...................................................................................................................................... 25
Actuating Variable Safety Functions .............................................................................................................................. 266
Adaptation Factor ........................................................................................................................................................... 121
Adaptation Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 121
Additional Bin Weighers ................................................................................................................................................... 12
additional containers ........................................................................................................................................................ 12
Additional device ............................................................................................................................................ 176, 177, 178
Address .................................................................................................................................................................. 128, 129
Adjusting linearization .................................................................................................................................................... 251
Adjusting the flow rate regulation ..................................................................................................................................... 48
AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................................. 173
AI Offset ........................................................................................................................................................................ 208
AI Offset (B) .................................................................................................................................................................. 150
AI Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................... 208
AI Position Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................................. 149
AI Range ....................................................................................................................................................................... 208
AI Range (B) ................................................................................................................................................................. 150
Analog Channel A10 ........................................................................................................................................................ 81
Analog Channel A11 ........................................................................................................................................................ 81
Analog Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 111
Analog Setpoint Relat..................................................................................................................................................... 122
AO Actual Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
AO Bin Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 141, 157
AO Check Measurement Result .................................................................................................................................... 168
AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level ............................................................................................................................... 144
AO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 113
AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................................ 175
AO Flow Rate Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 175
AO Flow Rate Range .................................................................................................................................................... 175
AO Load ........................................................................................................................................................................ 112
AO Motor Speed Control ............................................................................................................................................... 113
AO Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 141, 157, 208
AO Offset (B)................................................................................................................................................................. 150
AO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 136
AO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 136
AO Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 208
AO Position Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................ 150
AO Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 141, 157, 208
AO Range (B)................................................................................................................................................................ 150
AO Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................................... 111
AO Speed...................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................................ 231
Assembling the Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................ 47
Authorization for Control Commands ............................................................................................................................... 22
Auto Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 160
Auto Zero Active ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
Auto Zero Limit ............................................................................................................................................................... 176
Automatic control ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Automatic control measurement unit (KME) ..................................................................................................................... 41
Basic Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 23
Basic Tare ...................................................................................................................................................................... 106
Batch Automatic Record................................................................................................................................................. 121
Batch control .................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 120

Index
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 120

Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................................................. 243
Batch Setpoint Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 123
Batch Setpoint Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 122
Batch Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................... 122
Batch Setpoint Source.................................................................................................................................................... 120
Batch Tolerance ............................................................................................................................................................. 123
Batching ........................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Baud rate................................................................................................................................................................ 128, 129
Baud Rate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
Behavior after Connecting the Power ............................................................................................................................... 13
Bin Controller ON ........................................................................................................................................................... 144
Bin fill level regulation via feed gate ............................................................................................................................... 247
Bin Level analog Input Offset ................................................................................................................................. 143, 153
Bin Level analog Input Range ................................................................................................................................ 143, 153
Bin Level Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 144
Bin Level MAX........................................................................................................................................................ 140, 156
Bin Level MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 140, 156
Bin Setpoint source ........................................................................................................................................................ 147
Bin Weigher.................................................................................................................................................................... 136
Bin Weigher Active ......................................................................................................................................................... 136
Bin Weigher: Display and Operation ................................................................................................................................ 29
Bin weigher: Scaling and threshold value....................................................................................................................... 245
Bin weight control ............................................................................................................................................................. 39
Bipolar Measurement ............................................................................................................................................. 138, 154
Block diagram: measuring the flow rate ......................................................................................................................... 233
Bluetooth channel broken................................................................................................................................................. 97
Bypass ................................................................................................................................................................... 109, 146
Bypass D Portion ........................................................................................................................................................... 146
Byte Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................... 127
CA01 Event Error LC Input........................................................................................................................................... 211
CA02 Event Tachometer Input ..................................................................................................................................... 212
CA03 Event Error LC Input (Bin) .................................................................................................................................. 212
CA05 Event Linearization Error .................................................................................................................................... 212
CA06 Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................ 212
CA07 Event DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................ 213
CA15 Event Error LC Input........................................................................................................................................... 213
CA16 Event LC Input > MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 225
Calibrating bin weighing ................................................................................................................................................... 50
Calibrating the Touchscreen ............................................................................................................................................ 36
Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 211
Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 105
Calibration programs ........................................................................................................................................................ 37
Calibration Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 106
Calibration Weight .................................................................................................................................................. 142, 158
CH02 Event Minimum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................. 213
CH03 Event Maximum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................ 213
CH04 Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 214
CH05 Event Relative Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................. 214
CH06 Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................... 214
CH07 Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 215
CH08 Event Feeder Not Stopped ................................................................................................................................. 215
CH09 Event No Check Release ................................................................................................................................... 215
CH10 Event Prepare Check Measurement .................................................................................................................. 215
CH11 Event Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................. 215
CH12 Event Check Gate Error ..................................................................................................................................... 216
CH13 Event Bin Error ................................................................................................................................................... 216
CH14 Event CO-Alarm Hopper .................................................................................................................................... 216
CH15 Event Min KME Setpoint .................................................................................................................................... 216
Check Gate Feedback.................................................................................................................................................... 168
Check Gate Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 169
Check in Keyboard Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 127
Check Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 213
Check Quantity............................................................................................................................................................... 162
Check Start Span ........................................................................................................................................................... 161
Check Start Tare ............................................................................................................................................................ 161

Index
Check System ................................................................................................................................................................ 158

Check System Influence................................................................................................................................................. 159
Check Valve Feedback .................................................................................................................................................. 171
Check with bulk solids ...................................................................................................................................................... 50
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation...................................................................................................... 268
Cleaning and Testing the Display..................................................................................................................................... 28
Cleaning the Screen and Information ............................................................................................................................... 36
CO01 Event Controller Limited ..................................................................................................................................... 217
CO02 Event MIN Flow Gate ......................................................................................................................................... 217
CO03 Event MAX Flow Gate........................................................................................................................................ 217
CO04 Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 217
CO06 Event MAX Flow Gate (B) .................................................................................................................................. 218
CO10 Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ................................................................................................................................... 218
Command and Edit Keys.................................................................................................................................................. 21
Commissioning................................................................................................................................................................. 47
Communication EasyServe ............................................................................................................................................ 124
Communication Fieldbus ................................................................................................................................................ 125
Compatibility DISOCONT Master ................................................................................................................................... 127
Compensation Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 178
Compensation analog Input Offset ................................................................................................................................. 182
Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................................ 182
Compensation Element .................................................................................................................................................. 110
Compensation Source .................................................................................................................................................... 179
Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 128
Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................................................................................. 204
Configuring Event Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 58
Configuring the Communication Path (Com) .................................................................................................................... 35
Configuring the Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 56
Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ............................................................................................................................. 33
Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ............................................................................... 14
Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 15
Connecting the measuring unit and electronic equipment electrically ................................................................................ 9
Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 17
Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) ................................................................................................................................ 36
Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 14, 16
Connection via Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................... 15
Connection via Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................... 14
Connection via RS-232 .................................................................................................................................................... 16
Connection via RS485...................................................................................................................................................... 15
Connection via WLAN ...................................................................................................................................................... 16
Constant controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 235
Continuous bin fill level control ....................................................................................................................................... 246
Control.............................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Control Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 139, 155
Control Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 139, 155
Control operating modes .................................................................................................................................................. 11
Control Sources ............................................................................................................................................................... 92
Controller........................................................................................................................................................................ 217
Controller in OFF-Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 142
Controller Magnitude Offset ................................................................................................................................... 108, 146
Controller Type............................................................................................................................................................... 107
Controlling tube type check bins .................................................................................................................................... 253
Correction Amount ......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Correction Evaluation ..................................................................................................................................................... 167
Correction Speed ........................................................................................................................................................... 167
Correction with a known quantity ................................................................................................................................... 252
Counter 1 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Counter 2 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Counter 3 Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Cycle Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Cyclic Auto Start............................................................................................................................................................. 160
D Filter TD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 145
D Portion TV................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 202
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ..................................................................................................................... 6
Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 163

Index
Data Format ................................................................................................................................................................... 129

Data Log ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................................................ 89
Data Log Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Data Log Value 10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 204
Data Log Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Data Log Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Data Log Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Data Log Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Data Log Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Data Log Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Data Log Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 204
Data Log Value 9 ........................................................................................................................................................... 204
Data Logging .................................................................................................................................................................. 202
Dead Band Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 147
Dead Band Factor .......................................................................................................................................................... 147
Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 183
Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Dead Time Active ........................................................................................................................................................... 183
Dead Time TT ................................................................................................................................................................ 145
Detail Selection ................................................................................................................................................................ 21
Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ....................................................................................................... 250
Deviation abs. max......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Deviation Offset.............................................................................................................................................................. 113
Deviation Range............................................................................................................................................................. 113
DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................................ 117
DI Batch Terminate ....................................................................................................................................................... 121
DI Bin Load Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 142
DI CO-Alarm Hopper ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
DI Conveying Air ........................................................................................................................................................... 188
DI Event Electricity 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
DI Event Mechanics 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 193
DI External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 114
DI Init. Controller ........................................................................................................................................................... 147
DI Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 117
DI Purge Air................................................................................................................................................................... 188
DI Reset Totalizer 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 117
DI Reset Totalizer 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 118
DI Switch On Compensation ......................................................................................................................................... 182
DI Volumetric Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 117
DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................................. 117
Dialog Behaviour .............................................................................................................................................................. 84
Difference Flow Rate ........................................................................................................................................................ 94
Difference Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................. 95
Difference Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................ 95
Difference Function .......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Digital Inputs .................................................................................................................................................................. 113
Digital Outputs................................................................................................................................................................ 118
Display and Operation Fields ........................................................................................................................................... 20
Display Filter .......................................................................................................................................................... 139, 155
Display Format ....................................................................................................................................................... 139, 155
Display Parameter Alterations .......................................................................................................................................... 30
Display Stored Counter Readings .................................................................................................................................... 29
Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ........................................................................................................................ 29
Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. .............................................................................................................. 29
DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 119
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 119
DO Agitator ON ............................................................................................................................................................. 177

Index
DO ALARM ................................................................................................................................................................... 118

DO Batch Running ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
DO Bin Filling ........................................................................................................................................................ 140, 156
DO Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................ 141, 157
DO Bin Level MIN ................................................................................................................................................. 140, 156
DO Check Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 168
DO Check Measurement Active .................................................................................................................................... 164
DO Check Valve ............................................................................................................................................................ 171
DO Control Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 163
DO Cooling.................................................................................................................................................................... 186
DO Correction Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 170
DO Dead Time Active.................................................................................................................................................... 184
DO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 118
DO Dribble Feed ........................................................................................................................................................... 122
DO Event Electricity ...................................................................................................................................................... 194
DO Event Mechanics..................................................................................................................................................... 194
DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 195
DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 195
DO FC-MAX Limit ......................................................................................................................................................... 191
DO FC-MIN Limit ........................................................................................................................................................... 192
DO Feeder ON .............................................................................................................................................................. 144
DO Feeder Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 118
DO Full Feed ................................................................................................................................................................. 122
DO Hopper Aeration ...................................................................................................................................................... 171
DO Keyboard Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 120
DO Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................................... 119
DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 119
DO Moisture active ........................................................................................................................................................ 174
DO Moisture MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 174
DO n-MIN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 119
DO ON/OFF Active ....................................................................................................................................................... 184
DO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 134
DO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 4 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 5 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 6 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 7 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 8 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 182
DO Pressure-MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 181
DO Pulse Counter ........................................................................................................................................................... 92
DO Purge Air ................................................................................................................................................................. 188
DO Ready ..................................................................................................................................................................... 195
DO Ready for Start........................................................................................................................................................ 195
DO Setpoint Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 184
DO Start Prefeeder ....................................................................................................................................................... 118
DO Ventilation ............................................................................................................................................................... 177
DO Volumetric Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 119
DO WARNING .............................................................................................................................................................. 120
DO Wheel Start ............................................................................................................................................................. 118
DO Blower ...................................................................................................................................................................... 193
DO Bluetooth Reset ......................................................................................................................................................... 97
DO Check Gate Closed .................................................................................................................................................. 172
DO Check Gate Opened ................................................................................................................................................ 172
DO Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................................. 165
DO Pressure Compen. ................................................................................................................................................... 171
DO Volum Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 120
Electrical Connections ...................................................................................................................................................... 47
Electrical System............................................................................................................................................................ 218
Emergency Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................... 189
Entering Basic parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 47
Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Event Absolute Span Correction Error .................................................................................................................. 167, 214
Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 166, 214
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................ 104, 223

Index
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................. 104, 225

Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................... 127, 229
Event Analog Input < Offset .................................................................................................................................. 103, 220
Event Batch setpoint Limit ..................................................................................................................................... 123, 222
Event Bin Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 170, 216
Event Bin Level MAX............................................................................................................................. 141, 157, 224, 225
Event Bin Level MIN ...................................................................................................................................... 140, 156, 226
Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 143, 217
Event Check Gate Error ........................................................................................................................................ 169, 216
Event CO-Alarm Hopper ....................................................................................................................................... 171, 216
Event Com. Bluetooth ................................................................................................................................................... 230
Event Communication HMI 1................................................................................................................................... 85, 229
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ................................................................................................................ 82, 228
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ................................................................................................................ 83, 228
Event Communication VHM serial ........................................................................................................................... 87, 229
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1................................................................................................................ 84, 230
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2................................................................................................................ 84, 230
Event Controller Limited ........................................................................................................................................ 102, 217
Event Cyclic Communication................................................................................................................................. 126, 229
Event Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 102, 223
Event DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................... 179, 213
Event DMS-Input < MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 180, 226
Event DMS-Input > MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 180, 224
Event Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 194, 220
Event Error LC Input ............................................................................................................................... 99, 154, 211, 213
Event Error LC Input (Bin) ..................................................................................................................................... 138, 212
Event Expect Acceptance ..................................................................................................................................... 165, 215
Event External Event 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 113, 227
Event FC-MAX Limit .............................................................................................................................................. 191, 224
Event FC-MIN Limit ............................................................................................................................................... 191, 226
Event Feeder Not Stopped .................................................................................................................................... 164, 215
Event LC Input > MAX........................................................................................................... 100, 138, 154, 223, 224, 225
Event Linearization Error ....................................................................................................................................... 207, 212
Event Maint. Electric.............................................................................................................................................. 124, 227
Event Maint.Feeder Run ....................................................................................................................................... 124, 227
Event MAX Flow Gate ........................................................................................................................................... 209, 217
Event MAX Flow Gate (B) ..................................................................................................................................... 151, 218
Event Maximum Fill Weight ................................................................................................................................... 163, 213
Event Maximum Load............................................................................................................................................ 105, 224
Event Mechanics ................................................................................................................................................... 194, 220
Event Mechatronics ............................................................................................................................................... 195, 220
Event Memory ....................................................................................................................................................... 102, 228
Event MIN Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 209, 217
Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ...................................................................................................................................... 151, 218
Event Min KME Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................... 172, 216
Event Minimum Fill Weight .................................................................................................................................... 163, 213
Event Moisture MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 175, 221
Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ............................................................................................................................. 115, 218
Event No Check Release ...................................................................................................................................... 161, 215
Event No Conveying Air ........................................................................................................................................ 189, 221
Event No Purge Air ............................................................................................................................................... 188, 221
Event Not Ready ................................................................................................................................................... 195, 220
Event Not Ready for Start ..................................................................................................................................... 195, 220
Event Out of Tolerance ......................................................................................................................................... 123, 221
Event Power Failure .............................................................................................................................................. 100, 218
Event Prepare Check Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 164, 215

Index
Event Press. Cooling ............................................................................................................................................. 187, 222

Event Pressure Blower .......................................................................................................................................... 192, 222
Event Pressure-MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 181, 225
Event Pressure-MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 181, 227
Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 167, 215
Event Relative Tare Correction Error .................................................................................................................... 166, 214
Event Run Disabled ................................................................................................................................................ 93, 220
Event Setpoint Limited .......................................................................................................................................... 100, 227
Event Speed-Min ................................................................................................................................................... 105, 226
Event Stand-By ....................................................................................................................................................... 99, 227
Event T_Volum. ....................................................................................................................................................... 98, 228
Event Tachometer Input .......................................................................................................................................... 99, 212
Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................... 176, 212
Event Temperature-MAX....................................................................................................................................... 186, 222
Event Group: Calibration ................................................................................................................................................ 211
Event Group: Check Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 213
Event Group: Controller.................................................................................................................................................. 217
Event Group: Electrical System ...................................................................................................................................... 218
Event Group: Interlock.................................................................................................................................................... 220
Event Group: Material Flow ............................................................................................................................................ 221
Event Group: MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 223
Event Group: MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 225
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 227
Event Group: System Message ...................................................................................................................................... 228
Event messages ............................................................................................................................................................... 20
Event Messages ............................................................................................................................................................. 211
Events Details ................................................................................................................................................................ 211
Exit Scale ......................................................................................................................................................................... 89
External Control Type....................................................................................................................................................... 44
Factor Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................. 101
FC Tolerance at 0% ...................................................................................................................................................... 191
FC Tolerance at 100% .................................................................................................................................................. 190
FC Tolerance at 50% .................................................................................................................................................... 190
FCB analog outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 196
FCB digital outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 199
FCB_AO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 196
FCB_AO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 196
FCB_AO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 197
FCB_AO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 198
FCB_AO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 198
FCB_DO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 199
FCB_DO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 199
FCB_DO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 200
FCB_DO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 200
FCB_DO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 200
FCB_DO 06 .................................................................................................................................................................... 200
FCB_DO 07 .................................................................................................................................................................... 200
FCB_DO 08 .................................................................................................................................................................... 200
FCB_DO 09 .................................................................................................................................................................... 200
FCB_DO 10 .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
FCB_DO 11 .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
FCB_DO 12 .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
FCB_DO 13 .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
FCB_DO 14 .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
FCB_DO 15 .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
FCB_DO 16 .................................................................................................................................................................... 201
FCB_DO 17 .................................................................................................................................................................... 202
FCB_DO 18 .................................................................................................................................................................... 202
FCB_DO 19 .................................................................................................................................................................... 202
FCB_DO 20 .................................................................................................................................................................... 202
Feeder Check FC ........................................................................................................................................................... 190
Feeder Constant ............................................................................................................................................................ 145
Feeder control .................................................................................................................................................................. 97
Feeder Definition .............................................................................................................................................................. 89
Feeder Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................ 98
Feeder Start ..................................................................................................................................................................... 92

Index
Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................................. 164

Feedrate Setpoint............................................................................................................................................................. 93
Fig. 01: MULTICOR measuring principle............................................................................................................................ 9
Fig. 02: The physical principle .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Fig. 03: Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................... 12
Fig. 04: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display ............................................................................................... 19
Fig. 05: Lines configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 26
Fig. 06: Selection dialog for process values ..................................................................................................................... 27
Fig. 07: Single Unit KME Model ....................................................................................................................................... 42
Fig. 08: Separated Units Control Type ............................................................................................................................. 43
Fig. 09: Filling System KME Type .................................................................................................................................... 44
Fig. 10: External KME Type ............................................................................................................................................. 44
Fig. 11: Regulating the feeder .......................................................................................................................................... 49
Fig. 12: Arrangement for verification with bulk material .................................................................................................... 50
Fig. 13: Parameter sets .................................................................................................................................................... 55
Fig. 14: Setpoint and switch-on sources......................................................................................................................... 231
Fig. 15: The start and stop sequence ............................................................................................................................. 232
Fig. 16: A simplified signal flow block diagram of 'calculating the flow rate' ................................................................... 234
Fig. 17: The 'constant controller' signal flow block diagram (simplified) ......................................................................... 236
Fig. 18: The signal flow block diagram step controller.................................................................................................... 240
Fig. 19: The feed gate control logic ................................................................................................................................ 242
Fig. 20: Batching flow chart without setpoint ramp ......................................................................................................... 243
Fig. 21: Scaling fill level measurement and threshold values ......................................................................................... 245
Fig. 22: VMC bin fill level controller ................................................................................................................................ 246
Fig. 23: Step controller for the bin fill level...................................................................................................................... 248
Fig. 24: Flow chart control measurement ....................................................................................................................... 250
Fig. 25: Linearization ...................................................................................................................................................... 251
Fig. 26: System architecture and signal processing ....................................................................................................... 252
Fig. 27: The tube control logic for check bins ................................................................................................................. 254
Fig. 28: The logic diagram of the link between events and ready messages ................................................................. 255
Fig. 29: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin .................................................... 257
Fig. 30: Example of a function block link ........................................................................................................................ 259
Fig. 31: Binary function blocks ....................................................................................................................................... 260
Fig. 32: Analog function blocks ...................................................................................................................................... 262
Fig. 33: The signal flow diagram for pressure compensation for the bins ...................................................................... 264
Fig. 34: Actuating variable safety circuit ......................................................................................................................... 266
Fig. 35: Test Connector .................................................................................................................................................. 268
Filling control bin weigher ................................................................................................................................................. 88
Filling System Control Type ............................................................................................................................................. 43
Filling Type ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................. 103
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ...................................................................................................................................... 103
Filter Deviation .............................................................................................................................................................. 103
Filter Load ..................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Filter Pressure Value DMS ............................................................................................................................................. 179
Filters ............................................................................................................................................................................. 103
Finish Check Measurement............................................................................................................................................ 162
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering........................................................................................................................ 6
Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 131
FLOAT-Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 129
Flow Gate ....................................................................................................................................................................... 207
Flow Rate Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 147
Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................ 111
Flow Rate Range ........................................................................................................................................................... 112
Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................................ 90
Format Data ................................................................................................................................................................... 125
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ................................................................................................................................ 261
Function Blocks for Binary Signals ................................................................................................................................. 260
Gateway ......................................................................................................................................................................... 134
General Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Gravimetric Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Handling the Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 259
Hardware Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 81
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 223
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................... 223
HI05 Event Deviation.................................................................................................................................................... 223

Index
HI09 Event Maximum Load .......................................................................................................................................... 224

HI10 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 224
HI11 Event Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 224
HI13 Event FC-MAX Limit ............................................................................................................................................ 224
HI14 Event DMS-Input > MAX...................................................................................................................................... 224
HI15 Event Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 225
HI16 Event Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 225
HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................................. 204
HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................................. 204
HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................................. 204
HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................................. 205
HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................................. 205
HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................................. 205
HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................................. 205
HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................................. 205
HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................................. 205
HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 205
Hourly Total Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 202
I-Component TN..................................................................................................................................................... 107, 145
ID Preset Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
ID Preset Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
ID Preset Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
ID Preset Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
ID Preset Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
ID Preset Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
ID Preset Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 131
ID Preset Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 132
ID Read Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
ID Read Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 133
ID Read Value 11 ........................................................................................................................................................... 133
ID Read Value 12 ........................................................................................................................................................... 133
ID Read Value 13 ........................................................................................................................................................... 133
ID Read Value 14 ........................................................................................................................................................... 133
ID Read Value 15 ........................................................................................................................................................... 133
ID Read Value 16 ........................................................................................................................................................... 134
ID Read Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
ID Read Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
ID Read Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
ID Read Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
ID Read Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
ID Read Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
ID Read Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................. 133
ID Read Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................................. 133
If OFF Reset Setpoint.................................................................................................................................................... 190
IL01 Event Run Disabled.............................................................................................................................................. 220
IL02 Event Mechanics .................................................................................................................................................. 220
IL03 Event Electricity .................................................................................................................................................... 220
IL04 Event Mechatronics .............................................................................................................................................. 220
IL05 Event Not Ready .................................................................................................................................................. 220
IL06 Event Not Ready for Start .................................................................................................................................... 220
Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................................. 184
Interlock.......................................................................................................................................................................... 220
Interlocking ..................................................................................................................................................................... 193
IP Address...................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ................................................................................................................................................. 28
KP Adaptation ................................................................................................................................................................ 110
Language ......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
LC Load Measurement .................................................................................................................................... 96, 137, 152
LC Characteristic Value.................................................................................................................................... 96, 137, 153
LC Filter.......................................................................................................................................................... 103, 137, 153
LC Rated Capacity ........................................................................................................................................... 96, 137, 153
Lever Arm......................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 104
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 104
Limit Max. Bin Error ........................................................................................................................................................ 169
Limit Values.................................................................................................................................................................... 104

Index
Linearization ........................................................................................................................................................... 206, 207

Linearization I1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
Linearization I2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
Linearization I3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 207
Linearization I4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 207
Linearization ON ............................................................................................................................................................ 206
Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206
Linearization S2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206
Linearization S3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206
Linearization S4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 207
Linearizing the measurement ........................................................................................................................................... 41
Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ..................................................................................................................... 255
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 225
LO07 Event Speed-Min ................................................................................................................................................ 226
LO09 Event Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 226
LO10 Event DMS-Input < MIN...................................................................................................................................... 226
LO11 Event Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 226
LO13 Event FC-MIN Limit ............................................................................................................................................ 226
LO16 Event Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 227
Load Offset..................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Load Range.................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Loading cell BT ID1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Loading cell BT ID2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Loadwheel start/stop ........................................................................................................................................................ 89
Logger cycle time ........................................................................................................................................................... 202
Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) ........................................................................................................................ 36
Lower Limit ............................................................................................................................................................. 107, 146
Maintenance and Recalibration ........................................................................................................................................ 53
Maintenance Electric ...................................................................................................................................................... 124
Maintenance Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................... 124
Maintenance interval ...................................................................................................................................................... 123
Manual control of the measuring wheel ............................................................................................................................ 30
Manual feeder control....................................................................................................................................................... 30
Material Flow .................................................................................................................................................................. 221
MAX ............................................................................................................................................................................... 223
Maximum Fill Weight ...................................................................................................................................................... 163
Measured Values and Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 21
Measuring Delay .............................................................................................................................................................. 98
Measuring principle ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
MF03 Event No Conveying Air ..................................................................................................................................... 221
MF04 Event No Purge Air ............................................................................................................................................ 221
MF05 Event Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 221
MF06 Event Out of Tolerance ...................................................................................................................................... 221
MF07 Event Batch setpoint Limit .................................................................................................................................. 222
MF13 Event Temperature-MAX ................................................................................................................................... 222
MF15 Event Pressure Blower....................................................................................................................................... 222
MF16 Event Press. Cooling.......................................................................................................................................... 222
MIN................................................................................................................................................................................. 225
Min. KME Feedrate ........................................................................................................................................................ 172
Minimum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................................... 162
Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation.................................................................................... 22
Moisture ......................................................................................................................................................................... 172
Moisture Active............................................................................................................................................................... 173
Moisture MAX................................................................................................................................................................. 174
Moisture Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 174
Moisture Range .............................................................................................................................................................. 174
Moisture Select .............................................................................................................................................................. 173
MULTICOR calibration ..................................................................................................................................................... 48
Name of the Device .......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Net Mask ........................................................................................................................................................................ 134
Nominal Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................... 138, 154
Nominal Flow Rate ........................................................................................................................................................... 90
Nominal Moisture ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
Nominal Speed................................................................................................................................................................. 96
Norming.......................................................................................................................................................................... 180
Offset FCB_AO 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196

Index
Offset FCB_AO 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 196

Offset FCB_AO 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 197
Offset FCB_AO 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 198
Offset FCB_AO 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 199
ON/OFF Clock ON ......................................................................................................................................................... 184
On/Off Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 21
ON/OFF Select............................................................................................................................................................... 183
Operating and Control Access ......................................................................................................................................... 13
Operating the calibration functions ................................................................................................................................... 32
Operating the control measurement (KME) ...................................................................................................................... 45
Operation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .......................................................................................................................... 39
Own Address.................................................................................................................................................................. 125
P01 - Hardware Modules.................................................................................................................................................. 81
P01.01 - Analog Channel A10 .......................................................................................................................................... 81
P01.02 - Analog Channel A11 .......................................................................................................................................... 81
P01.03 - VCU20100-Unit 2............................................................................................................................................... 82
P01.04 - VCU2 Analog Channel A10 .............................................................................................................................. 82
P01.06 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 .......................................................................................................... 82
P01.07 - VCU20100-Unit 3............................................................................................................................................... 82
P01.10 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 .......................................................................................................... 83
P01.11 - VHM RS485 Address......................................................................................................................................... 83
P01.12 - VMO20100-Unit 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 83
P01.13 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ......................................................................................................... 84
P01.14 - VMO20100-Unit 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 84
P01.15 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ......................................................................................................... 84
P02 - Dialog Behaviour .................................................................................................................................................... 84
P02.01 - Language ........................................................................................................................................................... 84
P02.02 - Units .................................................................................................................................................................. 84
P02.03 - Scale Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.04 - Access Rights Limitation HMI ............................................................................................................................ 85
P02.05 - Remote IP Address HMI 1 ................................................................................................................................. 85
P02.06 - Event Communication HMI 1 ............................................................................................................................ 85
P02.11 - Event Communication VHM serial .................................................................................................................... 87
P02.12 - Password ........................................................................................................................................................... 87
P02.13 - 2. Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 87
P02.14 - Reset Counter 1................................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.15 - Reset Counter 2................................................................................................................................................. 88
P02.16 - Batch control ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
P02.17 - Switch Grav./Vol. command .............................................................................................................................. 88
P02.18 - Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ........................................................................................................................ 88
P02.19 - Filling control bin weigher .................................................................................................................................. 88
P02.20 - Prefeeder start/stop ........................................................................................................................................... 88
P02.21 - Loadwheel start/stop.......................................................................................................................................... 89
P02.22 - Data Log ON/OFF.............................................................................................................................................. 89
P02.23 - Exit Scale ........................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03 - Feeder Definition .................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.01 - Control ............................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.02 - Wheel Continous Operation ............................................................................................................................... 90
P03.03 - Nominal Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................................ 90
P03.04 - Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................. 90
P03.05 - Counter 1 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 91
P03.06 - Counter 2 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 91
P03.07 - Counter 3 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 91
P03.08 - Pulse Length Total ............................................................................................................................................. 92
P03.09 - DO Pulse Counter............................................................................................................................................. 92
P03.10 - Totalizer Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 92
P04 - Control Sources ...................................................................................................................................................... 92
P04.01 - Feeder Start ....................................................................................................................................................... 92

Index
P04.02 - Feedrate Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................. 93

P04.03 - Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................. 93
P04.04 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 93
P04.05 - Source Run Enable............................................................................................................................................ 93
P04.06 - Event Run Disabled .......................................................................................................................................... 93
P04.07 - Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.08 - Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.09 - Relative Setpoint Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.10 - Difference Flow Rate ......................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.11 - Difference Flow Rate Range .............................................................................................................................. 95
P04.12 - Difference Flow Rate Offset............................................................................................................................... 95
P04.13 - Difference Function............................................................................................................................................ 95
P05 - Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 95
P05.01 - Speed Measurement ......................................................................................................................................... 95
P05.02 - Pulses per Motorrevolution ................................................................................................................................ 96
P05.03 - Nominal Speed .................................................................................................................................................. 96
P05.04 - LC Load Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 96
P05.05 - LC Characteristic Value ..................................................................................................................................... 96
P05.06 - LC Rated Capacity............................................................................................................................................. 96
P05.07 - Lever Arm .......................................................................................................................................................... 96
P05.08 - Wheel Radius .................................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.09 - Loading cell BT ID1 ........................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.10 - Loading cell BT ID2 ........................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.11 - DO Bluetooth Reset ........................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.12 - Bluetooth channel broken .................................................................................................................................. 97
P06 - Feeder control ........................................................................................................................................................ 97
P06.01 - Volumetric Start-Up ........................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.02 - Measuring Delay ................................................................................................................................................ 98
P06.03 - T_Volumetric ...................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.04 - Event T_Volum. ................................................................................................................................................ 98
P07 - Feeder Monitoring................................................................................................................................................... 98
P07.01 - Event Stand-By ................................................................................................................................................. 99
P07.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ......................................................................................................................................... 99
P07.03 - Event Tachometer Input ................................................................................................................................... 99
P07.04 - Event Error LC Input ......................................................................................................................................... 99
P07.05 - Event LC Input > MAX .................................................................................................................................... 100
P07.06 - Event Setpoint Limited .................................................................................................................................... 100
P07.07 - Event Power Failure ....................................................................................................................................... 100
P07.08 - Time Deviation ................................................................................................................................................. 101
P07.09 - Threshold Deviation ......................................................................................................................................... 101
P07.10 - Factor Deviation............................................................................................................................................... 101
P07.11 - Deviation abs. max. ......................................................................................................................................... 101
P07.12 - Event Deviation............................................................................................................................................... 102
P07.13 - Event Controller Limited ................................................................................................................................. 102
P07.14 - Event Memory................................................................................................................................................. 102
P07.15 - Event Analog Input < Offset ............................................................................................................................ 103
P08 - Filters .................................................................................................................................................................... 103
P08.01 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 103
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................... 103
P08.03 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ........................................................................................................................ 103
P08.04 - Filter Load ....................................................................................................................................................... 103
P08.05 - Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................ 103
P09 - Limit Values .......................................................................................................................................................... 104
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................ 104
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ........................................................................................................................... 104
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ........................................................................................................................... 104
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX .......................................................................................................................... 104
P09.05 - Value for Load-Max ......................................................................................................................................... 105
P09.06 - Event Maximum Load ..................................................................................................................................... 105
P09.07 - Speed-Min Value ............................................................................................................................................. 105
P09.08 - Event Speed-Min ............................................................................................................................................ 105
P10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................................................................................... 105
P10.01 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................. 106
P10.02 - Basic Tare ....................................................................................................................................................... 106
P10.03 - Tare Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 106
P10.04 - Zeroing Limit .................................................................................................................................................... 106

Index
P10.05 - Calibration Time............................................................................................................................................... 106

P10.06 - Tare Correction Check ..................................................................................................................................... 106
P11 - Rate controller ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
P11.01 - Controller Type ................................................................................................................................................ 107
P11.02 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 107
P11.03 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 107
P11.04 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
P11.05 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 108
P11.06 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 108
P11.07 - Position at STOP ............................................................................................................................................. 108
P11.08 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 109
P11.09 - Store ................................................................................................................................................................ 109
P11.10 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ...................................................................................................................................... 109
P11.11 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ..................................................................................................................................... 109
P11.12 - S P-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 109
P11.13 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................ 110
P11.14 - S Threshold Response ................................................................................................................................... 110
P11.15 - Compensation Element ................................................................................................................................... 110
P11.16 - KP Adaptation .................................................................................................................................................. 110
P11.17 - Setpoint Threshold........................................................................................................................................... 110
P12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
P12.01 - AO Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................... 111
P12.02 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 111
P12.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................ 111
P12.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................... 111
P12.05 - Flow Rate Offset .............................................................................................................................................. 111
P12.06 - Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................. 112
P12.07 - AO Load ......................................................................................................................................................... 112
P12.08 - Load Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
P12.09 - Load Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 112
P12.10 - AO Speed ....................................................................................................................................................... 112
P12.11 - Speed Offset .................................................................................................................................................... 112
P12.12 - Speed Range ................................................................................................................................................... 112
P12.13 - AO Deviation................................................................................................................................................... 113
P12.14 - Deviation Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 113
P12.15 - Deviation Range .............................................................................................................................................. 113
P12.16 - AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................ 113
P13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 113
P13.01 - Event External Event 1 ................................................................................................................................... 113
P13.02 - DI External Event 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 114
P13.09 - Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ...................................................................................................................... 115
P13.15 - DI Acknowledge Events .................................................................................................................................. 117
P13.16 - DI Local Mode................................................................................................................................................. 117
P13.17 - DI Volumetric Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 117
P13.18 - DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................... 117
P13.19 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 117
P13.20 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 118
P14 - Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 118
P14.01 - DO Wheel Start............................................................................................................................................... 118
P14.02 - DO Feeder Started ......................................................................................................................................... 118
P14.03 - DO Start Prefeeder ......................................................................................................................................... 118
P14.04 - DO ALARM ..................................................................................................................................................... 118
P14.05 - DO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................. 118
P14.06 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 119
P14.07 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 119

Index
P14.08 - DO Load MAX................................................................................................................................................. 119

P14.09 - DO n-MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 119
P14.10 - DO Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 119
P14.11 - DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 119
P14.12 - DO WARNING ................................................................................................................................................ 120
P14.13 - DO Keyboard Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 120
P14.14 - DO Volum Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 120
P15 - Batch Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 120
P15.01 - Batch Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 120
P15.02 - Batch Setpoint Source ..................................................................................................................................... 120
P15.03 - Adaptation Time............................................................................................................................................... 121
P15.04 - Correction Amount ........................................................................................................................................... 121
P15.05 - Adaptation Factor ............................................................................................................................................ 121
P15.06 - Batch Automatic Record .................................................................................................................................. 121
P15.07 - DI Batch Terminate ......................................................................................................................................... 121
P15.08 - DO Batch Running .......................................................................................................................................... 122
P15.09 - DO Dribble Feed ............................................................................................................................................. 122
P15.10 - DO Full Feed .................................................................................................................................................. 122
P15.11 - Analog Setpoint Relat. ..................................................................................................................................... 122
P15.12 - Batch Setpoint Range ...................................................................................................................................... 122
P15.13 - Batch Setpoint Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 122
P15.14 - Batch Tolerance............................................................................................................................................... 123
P15.15 - Event Out of Tolerance ................................................................................................................................... 123
P15.16 - Batch Setpoint Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 123
P15.17 - Event Batch setpoint Limit .............................................................................................................................. 123
P16 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................................. 123
P16.01 - Maintenance Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 124
P16.02 - Event Maint. Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 124
P16.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................ 124
P16.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................. 124
P17 - Communication EasyServe .................................................................................................................................. 124
P17.01 - Own Address ................................................................................................................................................... 125
P17.02 - Baud Rate ........................................................................................................................................................ 125
P17.03 - Format Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 125
P18 - Communication Fieldbus ...................................................................................................................................... 125
P18.01 - Protocol Type................................................................................................................................................... 126
P18.02 - Timeout Host ................................................................................................................................................... 126
P18.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .......................................................................................................................... 126
P18.04 - Event Acyclic Communication......................................................................................................................... 127
P18.05 - Check in Keyboard Mode ................................................................................................................................ 127
P18.06 - Compatibility DISOCONT Master .................................................................................................................... 127
P18.07 - Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................... 127
P18.08 - Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 127
P18.09 - Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 128
P18.10 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 128
P18.11 - Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 128
P18.12 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 128
P18.13 - Data Format ..................................................................................................................................................... 129
P18.14 - Physics ............................................................................................................................................................ 129
P18.15 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P18.16 - FLOAT-Format................................................................................................................................................. 129
P18.17 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P18.18 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 129
P18.19 - Parameter ........................................................................................................................................................ 130
P18.20 - Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................... 130
P18.21 - READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................... 130
P18.22 - Access Rights Limitation FB ............................................................................................................................ 130
P18.23 - Remote IP Address FB .................................................................................................................................... 130
P19 - Fixed mode configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 131
P19.01 - ID Preset Value 1............................................................................................................................................. 131
P19.02 - ID Preset Value 2............................................................................................................................................. 131
P19.03 - ID Preset Value 3............................................................................................................................................. 131
P19.04 - ID Preset Value 4............................................................................................................................................. 131
P19.05 - ID Preset Value 5............................................................................................................................................. 131
P19.06 - ID Preset Value 6............................................................................................................................................. 131
P19.07 - ID Preset Value 7............................................................................................................................................. 131

Index
P19.08 - ID Preset Value 8............................................................................................................................................. 132

P19.09 - ID Read Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 132
P19.10 - ID Read Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 132
P19.11 - ID Read Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 132
P19.12 - ID Read Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 132
P19.13 - ID Read Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 132
P19.14 - ID Read Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 132
P19.15 - ID Read Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 132
P19.16 - ID Read Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................. 133
P19.17 - ID Read Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................. 133
P19.18 - ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................ 133
P19.19 - ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................ 133
P19.20 - ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................ 133
P19.21 - ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................ 133
P19.22 - ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................ 133
P19.23 - ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................ 133
P19.24 - ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................ 134
P20 - Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................................ 134
P20.01 - IP Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 134
P20.02 - Net Mask ......................................................................................................................................................... 134
P20.03 - Gateway .......................................................................................................................................................... 134
P21 - PLC Outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 134
P21.01 - DO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 134
P21.02 - DO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P21.03 - DO PLC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P21.04 - DO PLC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P21.05 - DO PLC 5 ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P21.06 - DO PLC 6 ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P21.07 - DO PLC 7 ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P21.08 - DO PLC 8 ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
P21.09 - AO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 136
P21.10 - AO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 136
P22 - Bin Weigher .......................................................................................................................................................... 136
P22.01 - Bin Weigher Active .......................................................................................................................................... 136
P22.02 - LC Load Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 137
P22.03 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 137
P22.04 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 137
P22.05 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 137
P22.06 - Bipolar Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 138
P22.07 - Event Error LC Input (Bin) .............................................................................................................................. 138
P22.09 - Nominal Bin Load ............................................................................................................................................ 138
P22.10 - Display Format................................................................................................................................................. 139
P22.11 - Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................... 139
P22.12 - Control Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 139
P22.13 - Control Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 139
P22.14 - DO Bin Filling .................................................................................................................................................. 140
P22.15 - Bin Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 140
P22.16 - Event Bin Level MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 140
P22.17 - DO Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 140
P22.18 - Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 140
P22.19 - Event Bin Level MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 141
P22.20 - DO Bin Level MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 141
P22.21 - AO Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................... 141
P22.22 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 141
P22.23 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 141
P22.25 - Tare (Bin)......................................................................................................................................................... 142
P22.26 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 142
P22.27 - Controller in OFF-Mode ................................................................................................................................... 142
P22.28 - DI Bin Load Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 142
P22.29 - Event Bin Load MAX Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 143
P22.30 - Bin Level analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................... 143
P22.31 - Bin Level analog Input Range .......................................................................................................................... 143
P23 - Bin Level Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 144
P23.01 - Bin Controller ON............................................................................................................................................. 144

Index
P23.02 - Filling Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 144

P23.03 - AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level................................................................................................................. 144
P23.04 - DO Feeder ON................................................................................................................................................ 144
P23.05 - Setpoint Bin Level ............................................................................................................................................ 144
P23.06 - Feeder Constant .............................................................................................................................................. 145
P23.07 - Dead Time TT .................................................................................................................................................. 145
P23.08 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 145
P23.09 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 145
P23.10 - D Portion TV .................................................................................................................................................... 145
P23.11 - D Filter TD ....................................................................................................................................................... 145
P23.12 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 146
P23.13 - Bypass D Portion ............................................................................................................................................. 146
P23.14 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 146
P23.15 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 146
P23.16 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 146
P23.17 - Dead Band Deviation ....................................................................................................................................... 147
P23.18 - Dead Band Factor............................................................................................................................................ 147
P23.19 - Setpoint Filter................................................................................................................................................... 147
P23.20 - Flow Rate Filter................................................................................................................................................ 147
P23.21 - DI Init. Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 147
P23.22 - Bin Setpoint source.......................................................................................................................................... 147
P23.23 - Stepper ............................................................................................................................................................ 148
P23.24 - S P-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 148
P23.25 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................ 148
P23.26 - S D-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 148
P23.27 - S Threshold Resp. .......................................................................................................................................... 149
P23.28 - S Compensation Element ............................................................................................................................... 149
P23.29 - S DO Open Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................. 149
P23.30 - S DO Close Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................. 149
P23.31 - AI Position Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................... 149
P23.32 - AI Offset (B) .................................................................................................................................................... 150
P23.33 - AI Range (B) ................................................................................................................................................... 150
P23.34 - AO Position Flow Gate (B) .............................................................................................................................. 150
P23.35 - AO Offset (B) .................................................................................................................................................. 150
P23.36 - AO Range (B) ................................................................................................................................................. 150
P23.37 - Event MIN Flow Gate (B) ................................................................................................................................ 151
P23.38 - Position MIN Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................. 151
P23.39 - Event MAX Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................... 151
P23.40 - Position MAX Flow Gate(B) ............................................................................................................................. 152
P24 - Second Bin Weigher ............................................................................................................................................. 152
P24.01 - Second Bin Weigher Active ............................................................................................................................. 152
P24.02 - LC Load Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 152
P24.03 - Bin Level analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................... 153
P24.04 - Bin Level analog Input Range .......................................................................................................................... 153
P24.05 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 153
P24.06 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 153
P24.07 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 153
P24.08 - Bipolar Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 154
P24.09 - Event Error LC Input ....................................................................................................................................... 154
P24.11 - Nominal Bin Load ............................................................................................................................................ 154
P24.12 - Display Format................................................................................................................................................. 155
P24.13 - Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................... 155
P24.14 - Control Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 155
P24.15 - Control Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 155
P24.16 - DO Bin Filling .................................................................................................................................................. 156
P24.17 - Bin Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 156
P24.18 - Event Bin Level MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 156
P24.19 - DO Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 156
P24.20 - Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 156
P24.21 - Event Bin Level MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 157
P24.22 - DO Bin Level MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 157
P24.23 - AO Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................... 157
P24.24 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 157
P24.25 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 157

Index
P24.27 - Tare (Bin)......................................................................................................................................................... 158

P24.28 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 158
P25 - Check System ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
P25.01 - Type of Check System ..................................................................................................................................... 159
P25.02 - Check System Influence .................................................................................................................................. 159
P25.03 - Auto Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 160
P25.04 - Cyclic Auto Start .............................................................................................................................................. 160
P25.05 - Cycle Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 160
P25.06 - Release Check System ................................................................................................................................... 160
P25.07 - Event No Check Release................................................................................................................................ 161
P25.08 - Check Start Span............................................................................................................................................. 161
P25.09 - Check Start Tare.............................................................................................................................................. 161
P25.10 - Accept Correction ............................................................................................................................................ 161
P25.11 - Finish Check Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 162
P25.12 - Check Quantity ................................................................................................................................................ 162
P25.13 - Storage Quantity .............................................................................................................................................. 162
P25.14 - Minimum Fill Weight ........................................................................................................................................ 162
P25.15 - Event Minimum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................. 163
P25.16 - Maximum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................... 163
P25.17 - Event Maximum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................ 163
P25.18 - Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................. 163
P25.19 - DO Control Started ......................................................................................................................................... 163
P25.20 - Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................... 164
P25.21 - Event Feeder Not Stopped ............................................................................................................................. 164
P25.22 - Event Prepare Check Measurement ............................................................................................................... 164
P25.23 - DO Check Measurement Active...................................................................................................................... 164
P25.24 - Event Expect Acceptance ............................................................................................................................... 165
P25.25 - DO Expect Acceptance.................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.26 - Absolute Range ............................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.27 - Relative Range ................................................................................................................................................ 165
P25.28 - Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 166
P25.29 - Event Relative Tare Correction Error .............................................................................................................. 166
P25.30 - Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................ 167
P25.31 - Event Relative Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 167
P25.32 - Correction Evaluation ...................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.33 - Correction Speed ............................................................................................................................................. 167
P25.34 - AO Check Measurement Result ..................................................................................................................... 168
P25.35 - DO Check Gate .............................................................................................................................................. 168
P25.36 - Check Gate Feedback ..................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.37 - Check Gate Time ............................................................................................................................................. 169
P25.38 - Event Check Gate Error.................................................................................................................................. 169
P25.39 - Limit Max. Bin Error ......................................................................................................................................... 169
P25.40 - Event Bin Error ............................................................................................................................................... 170
P25.41 - DO Correction Error ........................................................................................................................................ 170
P26 - Tube Control ......................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.01 - DI CO-Alarm Hopper ...................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.02 - Event CO-Alarm Hopper ................................................................................................................................. 171
P26.03 - DO Check Valve ............................................................................................................................................. 171
P26.04 - Check Valve Feedback .................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.05 - DO Hopper Aeration ....................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.06 - DO Pressure Compen. .................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.07 - DO Check Gate Opened .................................................................................................................................. 172
P26.08 - DO Check Gate Closed ................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.09 - Min. KME Feedrate .......................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.10 - Event Min KME Setpoint ................................................................................................................................. 172
P27 - Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................ 172
P27.01 - Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................ 173
P27.02 - Moisture Select ................................................................................................................................................ 173
P27.03 - AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................... 173
P27.04 - Nominal Moisture ............................................................................................................................................. 173
P27.05 - Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 174
P27.06 - Moisture Range ............................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.07 - DO Moisture active ......................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.08 - Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 174
P27.09 - DO Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.10 - Event Moisture MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 175

Index
P27.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................. 175

P27.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 175
P27.13 - AO Flow Rate Range ...................................................................................................................................... 175
P27.14 - Pulse Counter corrected .................................................................................................................................. 175
P28 - Additional device................................................................................................................................... 176, 177, 178
P28.01 - Auto Zero Active .............................................................................................................................................. 176
P28.02 - Auto Zero Limit ................................................................................................................................................ 176
P28.03 - Event Tare Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 176
P28.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active ....................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.06 - DO Agitator ON............................................................................................................................................... 177
P28.07 - START Agitator................................................................................................................................................ 177
P28.08 - DO Ventilation................................................................................................................................................. 177
P28.09 - Ventilation Time ............................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.10 - Ventilation Pulse .............................................................................................................................................. 178
P28.11 - Ventilation Pause ............................................................................................................................................. 178
P29 - Pressure Compensation ....................................................................................................................................... 178
P29.01 - Compensation Active ....................................................................................................................................... 178
P29.02 - Compensation Source ..................................................................................................................................... 179
P29.03 - Pressure Characteristic Value ......................................................................................................................... 179
P29.04 - Pressure Rated Cap. ....................................................................................................................................... 179
P29.05 - Filter Pressure Value DMS .............................................................................................................................. 179
P29.06 - Event DMS-Input ............................................................................................................................................ 179
P29.07 - Event DMS-Input > MAX................................................................................................................................. 180
P29.08 - Event DMS-Input < MIN .................................................................................................................................. 180
P29.09 - Zero ................................................................................................................................................................. 180
P29.10 - Norming ........................................................................................................................................................... 180
P29.11 - Pressure-MIN................................................................................................................................................... 181
P29.12 - Event Pressure-MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 181
P29.13 - DO Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 181
P29.14 - Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 181
P29.15 - Event Pressure-MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 181
P29.16 - DO Pressure-MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 182
P29.17 - DI Switch On Compensation ........................................................................................................................... 182
P29.18 - Compensation analog Input Offset .................................................................................................................. 182
P29.19 - Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................. 182
P30 - Dead Time ............................................................................................................................................................ 182
P30.01 - Dead Time Active ............................................................................................................................................ 183
P30.02 - Dead Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 183
P30.03 - Setpoint Select................................................................................................................................................. 183
P30.04 - Setpoint Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 183
P30.05 - ON/OFF Select ................................................................................................................................................ 183
P30.06 - ON/OFF Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 184
P30.07 - Time Elements Preassign ................................................................................................................................ 184
P30.08 - Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................... 184
P30.09 - DO Dead Time Active ..................................................................................................................................... 184
P30.10 - DO Setpoint Active ......................................................................................................................................... 184
P30.11 - DO ON/OFF Active ......................................................................................................................................... 184
P31 - Process Temperature ........................................................................................................................................... 184
P31.01 - Temperature Active ......................................................................................................................................... 185
P31.02 - Temperature Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 185
P31.03 - Temperature Norming MIN .............................................................................................................................. 185
P31.04 - Temperature Norming MAX ............................................................................................................................. 185
P31.05 - Temperature Norming Offset ........................................................................................................................... 185
P31.06 - Temperature Norming Range .......................................................................................................................... 185
P31.07 - Temperature MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 186
P31.08 - Event Temperature-MAX ................................................................................................................................ 186
P31.09 - Temperature Cooling ....................................................................................................................................... 186
P31.10 - DO Cooling ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
P31.11 - Temperature Hysteresis .................................................................................................................................. 186
P31.12 - Pressure Cooling OK ....................................................................................................................................... 187
P31.13 - Event Press. Cooling ...................................................................................................................................... 187
P32 - Safety Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 187
P32.01 - Safety activation Option code ......................................................................................................................... 187
P32.02 - DI Purge Air .................................................................................................................................................... 188
P32.03 - DO Purge Air .................................................................................................................................................. 188

Index
P32.04 - Event No Purge Air ......................................................................................................................................... 188

P32.05 - DI Conveying Air ............................................................................................................................................. 188
P32.06 - Event No Conveying Air.................................................................................................................................. 189
P32.07 - Source Emergency Setpoint ............................................................................................................................ 189
P32.08 - Emergency Setpoint ........................................................................................................................................ 189
P32.09 - Setpoint Step + ................................................................................................................................................ 189
P32.10 - Setpoint Step - ................................................................................................................................................. 189
P32.11 - Setpoint Factor ................................................................................................................................................ 189
P32.12 - If OFF Reset Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................... 190
P32.13 - Feeder Check FC ............................................................................................................................................ 190
P32.14 - FC Tolerance at 100% .................................................................................................................................... 190
P32.15 - FC Tolerance at 50% ...................................................................................................................................... 190
P32.16 - FC Tolerance at 0% ........................................................................................................................................ 191
P32.17 - Event FC-MIN Limit ........................................................................................................................................ 191
P32.18 - Event FC-MAX Limit ....................................................................................................................................... 191
P32.19 - DO FC-MAX Limit ........................................................................................................................................... 191
P32.20 - DO FC-MIN Limit ............................................................................................................................................ 192
P32.21 - Start Delay ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.23 - Pressure Blower OK ........................................................................................................................................ 192
P32.24 - Event Pressure Blower ................................................................................................................................... 192
P32.26 - DO Blower ....................................................................................................................................................... 193
P33 - Interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................... 193
P33.01 - DI Event Mechanics 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 193
P33.06 - DI Event Electricity 1....................................................................................................................................... 194
P33.09 - DO Event Mechanics ...................................................................................................................................... 194
P33.10 - Event Mechanics ............................................................................................................................................ 194
P33.11 - DO Event Electricity ........................................................................................................................................ 194
P33.12 - Event Electricity .............................................................................................................................................. 194
P33.13 - DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................... 195
P33.14 - DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................... 195
P33.15 - Event Mechatronics ........................................................................................................................................ 195
P33.16 - DO Ready ....................................................................................................................................................... 195
P33.17 - Event Not Ready............................................................................................................................................. 195
P33.18 - DO Ready for Start ......................................................................................................................................... 195
P33.19 - Event Not Ready for Start ............................................................................................................................... 195
P34 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................................................................................. 196
P34.01 - FCB_AO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 196
P34.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P34.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 196
P34.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 196
P34.05 - FCB_AO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 196
P34.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 196
P34.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 197
P34.09 - FCB_AO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 197
P34.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 197
P34.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................ 197
P34.13 - FCB_AO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 198
P34.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 198
P34.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................ 198
P34.17 - FCB_AO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 198
P34.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 199
P34.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................ 199
P35 - FCB digital outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 199
P35.01 - FCB_DO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 199
P35.02 - FCB_DO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 199
P35.03 - FCB_DO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 200

Index
P35.04 - FCB_DO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 200

P35.05 - FCB_DO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 200
P35.06 - FCB_DO 06 ..................................................................................................................................................... 200
P35.07 - FCB_DO 07 ..................................................................................................................................................... 200
P35.08 - FCB_DO 08 ..................................................................................................................................................... 200
P35.09 - FCB_DO 09 ..................................................................................................................................................... 200
P35.10 - FCB_DO 10 ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
P35.11 - FCB_DO 11 ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
P35.12 - FCB_DO 12 ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
P35.13 - FCB_DO 13 ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
P35.14 - FCB_DO 14 ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
P35.15 - FCB_DO 15 ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
P35.16 - FCB_DO 16 ..................................................................................................................................................... 201
P35.17 - FCB_DO 17 ..................................................................................................................................................... 202
P35.18 - FCB_DO 18 ..................................................................................................................................................... 202
P35.19 - FCB_DO 19 ..................................................................................................................................................... 202
P35.20 - FCB_DO 20 ..................................................................................................................................................... 202
P36 - Data Logging ........................................................................................................................................................ 202
P36.01 - Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................ 202
P36.02 - Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................... 202
P36.03 - Logger cycle time............................................................................................................................................. 202
P36.04 - Data Log Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 203
P36.05 - Data Log Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 203
P36.06 - Data Log Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 203
P36.07 - Data Log Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 203
P36.08 - Data Log Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 203
P36.09 - Data Log Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................. 203
P36.10 - Data Log Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................. 203
P36.11 - Data Log Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................. 204
P36.12 - Data Log Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................. 204
P36.13 - Data Log Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................... 204
P37 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................................................................................... 204
P37.01 - HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................... 204
P37.02 - HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................... 204
P37.03 - HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................... 204
P37.04 - HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................... 205
P37.05 - HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................... 205
P37.06 - HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................... 205
P37.07 - HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................... 205
P37.08 - HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................... 205
P37.09 - HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................... 205
P37.10 - HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 205
P38 - Linearization ................................................................................................................................................. 206, 207
P38.01 - Linearization ON .............................................................................................................................................. 206
P38.02 - Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................... 206
P38.03 - Linearization I1 ................................................................................................................................................ 206
P38.10 - Event Linearization Error ................................................................................................................................ 207
P39 - Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 207
P39.01 - S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 207
P39.02 - S DO Close Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 208
P39.03 - AI Position Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................... 208
P39.04 - AI Offset.......................................................................................................................................................... 208
P39.05 - AI Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 208
P39.06 - AO Position Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 208
P39.07 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 208
P39.08 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 208
P39.09 - Event MIN Flow Gate ...................................................................................................................................... 209
P39.10 - Position MIN Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 209
P39.11 - Event MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 209
P39.12 - Position MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................. 209

Index
Parameter ...................................................................................................................................................................... 130

Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules......................................................................................................................... 81
Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ........................................................................................................................... 84
Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ........................................................................................................................... 89
Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ............................................................................................................................. 92
Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .................................................................................................................................... 95
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ............................................................................................................................... 97
Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring.......................................................................................................................... 98
Parameter Block 08 - Filters ........................................................................................................................................... 103
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ................................................................................................................................. 104
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ........................................................................................................................... 105
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ............................................................................................................................. 106
Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 111
Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 113
Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 118
Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ................................................................................................................................. 120
Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval.................................................................................................................... 123
Parameter Block 17 - Communication EasyServe ......................................................................................................... 124
Parameter Block 18 - Communication Fieldbus ............................................................................................................. 125
Parameter Block 19 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................ 130
Parameter Block 20 - Ethernet ....................................................................................................................................... 134
Parameter Block 21 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 134
Parameter Block 22 - Bin Weigher ................................................................................................................................. 136
Parameter Block 23 - Bin Level Controller ..................................................................................................................... 144
Parameter Block 24 - Second Bin Weigher .................................................................................................................... 152
Parameter Block 25 - Check System ............................................................................................................................. 158
Parameter Block 26 - Tube Control ................................................................................................................................ 170
Parameter Block 27 - Moisture ....................................................................................................................................... 172
Parameter Block 28 - Additional device.......................................................................................................................... 176
Parameter Block 29 - Pressure Compensation .............................................................................................................. 178
Parameter Block 30 - Dead Time ................................................................................................................................... 182
Parameter Block 31 - Process Temperature .................................................................................................................. 184
Parameter Block 32 - Safety Functions .......................................................................................................................... 187
Parameter Block 33 - Interlocking .................................................................................................................................. 193
Parameter Block 34 - FCB analog outputs ..................................................................................................................... 196
Parameter Block 35 - FCB digital outputs ...................................................................................................................... 199
Parameter Block 36 - Data Logging ............................................................................................................................... 202
Parameter Block 37 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................ 204
Parameter Block 38 - Linearization ................................................................................................................................ 206
Parameter Block 39 - Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 207
Parameter Details ............................................................................................................................................................ 81
Parameter List .................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Parameter Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 59
Parameters....................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Password ......................................................................................................................................................................... 87
P-Component KP ................................................................................................................................................... 107, 145
Physics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 129
PLC Functionality (Optional) .......................................................................................................................................... 258
PLC Outputs................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Position at STOP............................................................................................................................................................ 108
Position MAX Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................ 209
Position MAX Flow Gate(B)............................................................................................................................................ 152
Position MIN Flow Gate.................................................................................................................................................. 209
Position MIN Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................ 151
Prefeeder start/stop .......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................................. 130
Pressure Blower OK ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
Pressure Characteristic Value ........................................................................................................................................ 179
Pressure Compensation ................................................................................................................................................. 178
Pressure Cooling OK ..................................................................................................................................................... 187
Pressure Rated Cap. ...................................................................................................................................................... 179
Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................................ 181
Pressure-MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 181
Process Temperature ..................................................................................................................................................... 184
Protocol Type ................................................................................................................................................................. 126
Pulse Counter corrected................................................................................................................................................. 175

Index
Pulse Length Total ........................................................................................................................................................... 92

Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ............................................................................................................... 267
Pulses per Motorrevolution............................................................................................................................................... 96
Range Correction ........................................................................................................................................... 106, 142, 158
Range FCB_AO 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 196
Range FCB_AO 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 197
Range FCB_AO 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 197
Range FCB_AO 4 .......................................................................................................................................................... 198
Range FCB_AO 5 .......................................................................................................................................................... 199
Rate controller ................................................................................................................................................................ 106
Rated Data ....................................................................................................................................................................... 95
READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Reading and Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 30
Reference FCB_AO 1..................................................................................................................................................... 196
Reference FCB_AO 2..................................................................................................................................................... 197
Reference FCB_AO 3..................................................................................................................................................... 198
Reference FCB_AO 4..................................................................................................................................................... 198
Reference FCB_AO 5..................................................................................................................................................... 199
regulated .......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Relative Range............................................................................................................................................................... 165
Relative Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................................. 24
Relative Setpoint Offset.................................................................................................................................................... 94
Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................. 94
Release Check System .................................................................................................................................................. 160
Remote IP Address FB................................................................................................................................................... 130
Remote IP Address HMI 1................................................................................................................................................ 85
Reset Counter 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 87
Reset Counter 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 88
Reset to Factory Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 31
Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter .................................................................................................................. 25
Resolution ...................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .................................................. 22
S Compensation Element.............................................................................................................................................. 149
S D-Component ............................................................................................................................................................ 148
S DO Close Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 208
S DO Close Flow Gate (B) ............................................................................................................................................ 149
S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 207
S DO Open Flow Gate (B)............................................................................................................................................. 149
S I-Component ...................................................................................................................................................... 110, 148
S P-Component..................................................................................................................................................... 109, 148
S Threshold Resp. ........................................................................................................................................................ 149
S Threshold Response .................................................................................................................................................. 110
Safety activation Option code........................................................................................................................................ 187
Safety Function for Feeding Hazardous Materials (Coal Dust) ...................................................................................... 265
Safety Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 187
Safety notes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ....................................................................................................................................... 227
SC02 Event Stand-By .................................................................................................................................................. 227
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run .................................................................................................................................... 227
SC04 Event Maint. Electric........................................................................................................................................... 227
SC05 Event External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 227
SC10 Event T_Volum. .................................................................................................................................................. 228
Scale Name...................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Second Bin Weigher ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
Second Bin Weigher Active ............................................................................................................................................ 152
Second bin weight control ................................................................................................................................................ 40
Selecting the operating range .......................................................................................................................................... 20
Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) .................................................................................................................. 34
Separated Units Control Type .......................................................................................................................................... 43
Sequence Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................... 227
Service Functions ............................................................................................................................................................. 30

Index
Set setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................................... 24

Set the Homepage (Config).............................................................................................................................................. 34
Setpoint and switch-on sources ..................................................................................................................................... 231
Setpoint Bin Level .......................................................................................................................................................... 144
Setpoint Clock ON .......................................................................................................................................................... 183
Setpoint Factor ............................................................................................................................................................... 189
Setpoint Filter ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord .................................................................................................................................................... 109
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ................................................................................................................................................... 109
Setpoint Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 93, 111
Setpoint Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 93, 111
Setpoint Select ............................................................................................................................................................... 183
Setpoint Step - ............................................................................................................................................................... 189
Setpoint Step +............................................................................................................................................................... 189
Setpoint Threshold ......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ..................................................................................................................................... 33
Setting the Clock .............................................................................................................................................................. 31
Setting the Display ........................................................................................................................................................... 33
Setting the Pressure Compensation ............................................................................................................................... 263
Signal Words ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Signal Words for Application Notes .................................................................................................................................... 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 4
Simulation Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Single Unit Control Type .................................................................................................................................................. 42
Some definitions................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Source Emergency Setpoint........................................................................................................................................... 189
Source Relative Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................. 94
Source Run Enable .......................................................................................................................................................... 93
Special Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 25
Speed Measurement ........................................................................................................................................................ 95
Speed Offset .................................................................................................................................................................. 112
Speed Range ................................................................................................................................................................. 112
Speed-Min Value ............................................................................................................................................................ 105
Stand-By Limit Value ........................................................................................................................................................ 99
START Agitator .............................................................................................................................................................. 177
Start Delay ..................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Step controller ................................................................................................................................................................ 240
Stepper........................................................................................................................................................................... 148
Storage Quantity ............................................................................................................................................................ 162
Store............................................................................................................................................................................... 109
Switch Feeding On/Off ..................................................................................................................................................... 23
Switch Grav./Vol. command ............................................................................................................................................. 88
Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 88
Switch on.......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Switching the Scales On/Off............................................................................................................................................. 23
SY01 Event Memory .................................................................................................................................................... 228
SY02 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 228
SY03 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ........................................................................................................... 228
SY04 Event Communication HMI 1 .............................................................................................................................. 229
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial ...................................................................................................................... 229
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication .............................................................................................................................. 229
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................ 229
SY13 Event Com. Bluetooth......................................................................................................................................... 230
SY15 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ........................................................................................................... 230
SY16 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 230
Symbol for Running Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 21
System Message ............................................................................................................................................................ 228
T_Volumetric .................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Tab.01: Definitions for formula symbols ............................................................................................................................. 8
Tab.02: Operating access ................................................................................................................................................ 14
Tab.03: Function calls on the scales controller homepage............................................................................................... 18
Tab.04: Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation ................................................................................ 22
Tab.05: Control keys ........................................................................................................................................................ 26
Tab.06: Keys in the lines configuration ............................................................................................................................ 27

Index
Tab.07: Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5) ...................................................................................... 27
Tab.08: Bin weigher parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 29
Tab.09: Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level ..................................................................................................... 30
Tab.10: Parameter sets: Usage and activation ................................................................................................................ 31
Tab.11: Keys for the calibration programs........................................................................................................................ 32
Tab.12: Keys in the VHM configuration dialog ................................................................................................................. 33
Tab.13: Fields for setting the address .............................................................................................................................. 33
Tab.14: Parameters for the display .................................................................................................................................. 34
Tab.15: Keys in the list of scales ...................................................................................................................................... 34
Tab.16: Setting startup routine ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Tab.17: Alternatives ......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Tab.18: The details and process of taring ........................................................................................................................ 37
Tab.19: The details and process of zero setting............................................................................................................... 38
Tab.20: The details and process of taring for the bin weigher .......................................................................................... 38
Tab.21: The details and process of checking the weight of the bin weigher .................................................................... 39
Tab.22: The details and process of improving bin level regulation ................................................................................... 40
Tab.23: The details and process of taring the 2nd bin weigher ........................................................................................ 40
Tab.24: The details and process of checking the weight of the 2nd bin weigher.............................................................. 41
Tab.25: Suggested sequence for initial start-up ............................................................................................................... 47
Tab.26: Basic parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 48
Tab.27: Carrying out calibration ....................................................................................................................................... 49
Tab.28: Suggested actions............................................................................................................................................... 53
Tab.29: Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus................................................................................................. 55
Tab.30: Abbreviations frequently used in parameters ...................................................................................................... 56
Tab.31: Step-by-step specification of signal links............................................................................................................. 57
Tab.32: Signal sources and their descriptions.................................................................................................................. 57
Tab.33: Meaning of the columns ...................................................................................................................................... 57
Tab.34: The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal .......................................................... 58
Tab.35: Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel....................................................... 58
Tab.36: Event classes ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Tab.37: Event groups ..................................................................................................................................................... 211
Tab.38: The states and points in time in the flow chart .................................................................................................. 232
Tab.39: The relevant parameters ................................................................................................................................... 233
Tab.40: Designations in the signal flow diagram ............................................................................................................ 235
Tab.41: Controller models and how they are used ......................................................................................................... 235
Tab.42: Signals, blocks and parameters in the constant controller ................................................................................ 237
Tab.43: Special cases for KP and TN parameters ......................................................................................................... 237
Tab.44: Set-up notes for parameters in the constant controller...................................................................................... 238
Tab.45: Characteristics in special operational states ..................................................................................................... 239
Tab.46: The control parameters for the step controller .................................................................................................. 241
Tab.47: Switching and operational states....................................................................................................................... 241
Tab.48: Some signals of the control logic....................................................................................................................... 242
Tab.49: Process: discharge weighing with a regulating loss-in-weight feeder................................................................ 244
Tab.50: The meaning of the abbreviations in the block diagram .................................................................................... 249
Tab.51: Legend .............................................................................................................................................................. 253
Tab.52: The meaning of the signals ............................................................................................................................... 255
Tab.53: Blocks available for processing binary signals .................................................................................................. 261
Tab.54: The length of the counting pulse ....................................................................................................................... 268
Tab.55: The significance of the pulse weight ................................................................................................................. 268
Tare (Bin) ............................................................................................................................................................... 142, 158
Tare Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 106
Tare Correction Check ................................................................................................................................................... 106
Taring the 2nd bin weigher ............................................................................................................................................... 40
Taring the bin weigher ...................................................................................................................................................... 38
Taring the Coriolis flowthrough measurement .................................................................................................................. 37
Temperature Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 185
Temperature Cooling ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
Temperature Hysteresis ................................................................................................................................................. 186
Temperature MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 186
Temperature Measurement ............................................................................................................................................ 185
Temperature Norming MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 185
Temperature Norming MIN............................................................................................................................................. 185
Temperature Norming Offset.......................................................................................................................................... 185
Temperature Norming Range......................................................................................................................................... 185
Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................................................. 47
The Coriolis measuring principle ...................................................................................................................................... 10

Index
The flow rate regulation .................................................................................................................................................. 235

The web server in the scales controller (VCU) ................................................................................................................. 17
Threshold Deviation ....................................................................................................................................................... 101
Time Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................... 101
Time Elements Preassign .............................................................................................................................................. 184
Timeout Host .................................................................................................................................................................. 126
Totalizer Increment .......................................................................................................................................................... 92
Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Tube Control .................................................................................................................................................................. 170
Type of Check System ................................................................................................................................................... 159
Types of control measurement ......................................................................................................................................... 42
Units ................................................................................................................................................................................. 84
unregulated ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Upper Limit ............................................................................................................................................................. 108, 146
Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ........................................................................... 257
Value for Load-Max ........................................................................................................................................................ 105
VCU2 Analog Channel A10 ............................................................................................................................................. 82
VCU20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 82
VCU20100-Unit 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 82
Ventilation Pause ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
Ventilation Pulse ............................................................................................................................................................ 178
Ventilation Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 178
VHM operating panel ....................................................................................................................................................... 19
VHM RS485 Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 83
VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 83
VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 84
Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation ...................................................... 28
Volumetric Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Volumetric Start-Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 98
Volumetric Synchronous Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 11
WE01 Event Power Failure .......................................................................................................................................... 218
WE02 Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ......................................................................................................................... 218
WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset............................................................................................................................... 220
What is the DISOCONT Tersus? ....................................................................................................................................... 7
Wheel Continous Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 90
Wheel Radius ................................................................................................................................................................... 97
Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................. 127
Zero ................................................................................................................................................................................ 180
Zero Drop-Out Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 177
Zero Drop-Out Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 177
Zeroing Limit .................................................................................................................................................................. 106
Zero-setting for the Coriolis flowthrough measurement.................................................................................................... 37


BVH2412GB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BVH2412GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

© by Schenck Process GmbH

Note: Translation of the original German Instruction

(origin: ST4, 389079563 V1)

1 About This Manual ................................................................

3 General Diagram ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

4.3.2.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation............................................. 22

BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

5.1 Assembling the Electrical Components .............................................................................................. 47

6 Maintenance and Recalibration ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................ 199

8 Event Messages ................................................................

BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

1 About This Manual

This manual is available in different forms:

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

Acknowledging Event Messages

Service and Maintenance

Moisture and Humidity

2.1 Signal Words

2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components

BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

3.2 Some definitions

Abbreviatio Meaning Explanation Dimension Unit

BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

3.3 Measuring principle

3.3.1 Connecting the measuring unit and electronic equipment electrically

Fig. 1: MULTICOR measuring principle

Setpoint The setpoint of the flow rate LC Load cell

This system is suited for installation in encapsulated conveying paths.

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

3.3.2 The Coriolis measuring principle

Fig. 2: The physical principle

R The radius of the measuring wheel Z The centrifugal force

R0 The impact radius C Coriolis force

BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

3.4 Control operating modes

3.5 Automatic control

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

The segments shown in the figure mean the following:

3.7 Additional Bin Weighers

BV-H2412GB, 1241 DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual

4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

4.2 Operating and Control Access

Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

VHM operating panel X X VHM touch

DISOCONT® Tersus MULTICOR®, Instruction Manual BV-H2412GB, 1241

Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

Plant main computer via Fieldbus X (X) Plant main computer

4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)

4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable

4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth